serie 32 mlift vector - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/series 32 vvvf.pdf · autinor installation...

249
AUTINOR Installation Manual S S E E R R I I E E 3 3 2 2 M M L L I I F F T T V V E E C C T T O O R R P P r r o o g g r r a a m m m m a a t t i i o o n n V V e e c c t t o o r r i i e e l l l l e e Programme: B-HB32 Programme: VSC-V02 Version of 29 November 2000 7138

Upload: hoanglien

Post on 09-Aug-2018

225 views

Category:

Documents


3 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

7138

AUTINOR

Installation Manual

SSEERRIIEE 3322MMLLIIFFTT VVEECCTTOORR

PPrrooggrraammmmaattiioonn VVeeccttoorriieellllee

Programme: B-HB32Programme: VSC-V02 Version of 29 November 2000

Page 2: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:
Page 3: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

WARNING

This manual is deemed correct on going to press.

The information contained has been scrupulously checked. However AUTINOR declines allresponsibility for error or omission.

Should you notice any discrepancy or unclear description, or if you have any suggestions, wewould appreciate your written comments (by mail fax or Email) to:

Société AUTINOR - Service DocumentationZ.A. Les Marlières59710 AVELIN

[33] 03-20-62-56-00[33] [email protected]

This manual is the property of AUTINOR, from whom it may be bought (at the above address). Itmay however by freely copied in order to communicate information to those who might need it.

We can only authorise a complete copy, without neither addition nor removal ofinformation

Where quotations are taken, the following at least must be noted:

- The company name of AUTINOR,

- The date of the original edition.

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

Since the 1st January 1996 all lift installations are obliged to respect the essential requirements ofthe European Directive 89/336/CEE concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).

The equipment is only one component of an installation; it is therefore not obliged to show the marking as stated in this directive. However in order to allow you to write your declaration ofconformity, and according to professional rules, all AUTINOR controllers are supplied with anengagement of conformity.

Your declaration of conformity can rest on this engagement,

only if the equipment has been installed exactly as advised in this manual.

© Copyright 2000 AUTINOR All rights reserved.

Page 4: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:
Page 5: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

PREAMBLE

Handling advice for equipment:

Safety measures:

Follow the instructions which were given to you by your management when usingindividual protection equipment (gloves, shoes, glasses, restraint harness, etc).

Whatever the load, handling operations can be dangerous (collision, dropping, crushing,…). Wheneverpossible use mechanical handling rather than manual handling. When manual handling can not be avoided, respectthe rules.

At European level, these rules are set out in the Directive 90/269/CEE, Council Directive dated 19 May 1990"concerning minimal heath and safety instructions for manual load handling with risks, to the worker, notably in thelower spinal area".

En France, la réglementation de la manutention manuelle est constituée des textes suivants :

• Code du travail article R 231-72 (Décret n° 92-958 du 3 septembre 1992 transposant en droit français ladirective européenne 92/269/CEE)

« Lorsque le recours à la manutention manuelle est inévitable… un travailleur ne peut être admis à porterd’une façon habituelle des charges supérieures à 55 kilogrammes qu’à condition d’y avoir été reconnu aptepar le médecin du travail, sans que ces charges puissent être supérieures à 105 kilogrammes. »

• Décret n° 95-826 du 30 Juin 1995, Titre 1er - article 8 « fixant les prescriptions particulières de sécuritéapplicables aux travaux effectués sur les ascenseurs » + Circulaire de mise en œuvre DRT 96/3 du 25 Mars 1996

« … Les travaux comportant le port manuel d'une masse supérieure à 30 kilogrammes, ou comportant la poseou la dépose manuelle d'éléments d'appareils d'une masse supérieure à 50 kilogrammes, … doivent êtreeffectués par au moins deux travailleurs ; »

complétée par la norme française NF X 35-109 qui donne des recommandations plus précises qui prennent encompte les paramètres suivants : âge du travailleur, nature de la tâche (occasionnelle ou répétitive), charge unitaire,distance parcourue :

Load permitted(occasional carrying)

Load permitted(constant carrying)

Man 18 / 45 years 30 kg 25 kgMan 45 / 60 years 25 kg 20 kg

Page 6: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:
Page 7: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

TABLE OF CONTENTSChapter I - Generalities ......................................................................................................................... 11

How to install the controller cabinet ........................................................................................... 12Controller position and electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................... 13Minimum connections necessary for initial movement ................................................................ 18Location of terminal blocks .......................................................................................................... 22Location and function of fuses ..................................................................................................... 23Location of led, jumpers and relay .............................................................................................. 24Frequency drive parameter / diagnostic communication device................................................... 26Controller parameter / diagnostic communication device ........................................................... 31

Concerning the illustrations (, , , , , , ) ........................................................... 37

Chapter II - Installation & connecting the safety ........................................................................... 1Connecting the safety lane with automatic doors and machine room inspection box .................. 2Instruction for wiring any devices to the safety lane .................................................................... 3Measurement of the insulation of the safety chain ....................................................................... 4Connecting the doors safety contacts between 6 and 10 .............................................................. 5

Chapter III - Installation & connecting in Machine room ........................................................... 1Connecting in machine room ....................................................................................................... 2Motor screening cable ................................................................................................................. 3Motor ventilation detection by thermo-contact ............................................................................ 4Thermal protection of the motor & control of the machine room temperature ............................ 5Emergency electrical operation ................................................................................................... 6Viewing of the unlocking zone ...................................................................................................... 8Delayed departure ....................................................................................................................... 9Fault light (indicator) .................................................................................................................. 10Intercom ....................................................................................................................................... 11

Chapter IV - Installation & connecting in Shaft ............................................................................. 1Fixing the slotted-tape brackets ................................................................................................... 2Fixing the brackets for control of the door-zone .......................................................................... 3Position of the door-zone P01 sensor or proximity switches (I.L.S.) and tape head O03selector ......................................................................................................................................... 4Position of the vanes for door-zone P01 sensors in case of movement door open ....................... 5Position of the magnets for the door-zone read by proximity switches ........................................ 6Door security bridge board relevelling pre-opening board,Visualisation of the door-zone (N62) ........................................................................................... 7Door security bridge board relevelling pre-opening board,Visualisation of the door-zone (N57) ........................................................................................... 8

Chapter V - Installation & connecting on Landing ........................................................................ 1Connecting on landing: 2 to 8 levels (Sapb or collective 1 button) ............................................. 2Connecting on landing: Sapb more than 8 levels or collective 1 or 2 buttons / landing to 16levels maxi .................................................................................................................................... 3Combination of electronics boards .............................................................................................. 4Landing calls for single automatic operation, 2 to 8 levels ......................................................... 5

Page 8: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

TABLE OF CONTENTSChapter V - Installation & connecting on Landing (continued)

Landing calls for single automatic operation, 2 to 16 levels ....................................................... 7Landing calls for collective operation, 1 button, 2 to 8 levels ..................................................... 9Landing calls for collective operation, 1 button, 2 to 16 levels ................................................... 11Landing calls for full collective operation, 2 to 16 levels ............................................................ 13Double selective service landing calls ......................................................................................... 15Id 30 model, landing position indicator ....................................................................................... 18Id 50-1 model, landing position indicator .................................................................................... 19Id 50 model, landing position indicator ....................................................................................... 20Idfl 30 / 50 model, landing position indicator with arrows .......................................................... 21Standard programming ................................................................................................................ 22Idfl 30 / 50 md model, landing position indicator with scrolling messages arrows ..................... 23Position indicator with scrolling messages arrows programming ............................................... 24Fl 30 / 50 model, landing direction arrows ................................................................................. 25Model with light less than to 1, 2 W (total 2,4 W max), landing direction arrows ...................... 26Model with light superior to 1, 2 W (total 2,4 W max), landing direction arrows ....................... 27Next departure arrows ................................................................................................................. 28Landing selective gong ................................................................................................................. 31Landing out of service light ......................................................................................................... 33Landing « Engaged » light ........................................................................................................... 35

Chapter VI - Installation & connecting in Car ................................................................................ 1Connecting in car: 2 to 8 levels (Sapb or collective 1 button) ..................................................... 2Connecting in car: Sapb more than 8 levels or collective 1 or 2 buttons / landing, 2 to 16levels ............................................................................................................................................ 3Car calls for single automatic and collective operation, 1 button, 2 to 8 levels .......................... 4Car calls for collective operation 1 or 2 button(s), 2 to 16 levels ................................................ 6Double selective service car calls ................................................................................................ 8Connecting of tape head O03-1 & O03-2 for counting with slotted tape .................................... 10Car alarm button .......................................................................................................................... 12Car stop button ............................................................................................................................ 13Car gong ...................................................................................................................................... 14Unlocking retiring ramp with direct current ................................................................................ 16Front door three phase motor ...................................................................................................... 17Rear door three phase motor ....................................................................................................... 18Automatic door motor piloted by retiring ramp ........................................................................... 19Electronic door control unit OP06 or OP11 ................................................................................ 20Electronic door control unit OP15 .............................................................................................. 21Id 30 model, car position indicator .............................................................................................. 23Id 50-1 model, car position indicator ........................................................................................... 24Id 50 model, car position indicator .............................................................................................. 25Idfl 30 / 50 model, car position indicator with arrows ................................................................ 26Standard programming ................................................................................................................ 27Idfl 30 / 50 md model, car position indicator with scrolling messages arrows ............................ 28Position indicator with scrolling messages arrows programming ............................................... 29Fl 30 / 50 model, car direction arrows ........................................................................................ 30

Page 9: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

TABLE OF CONTENTSChapter VI - Installation & connecting in Car (continued)

Model with light less than to 1, 2 W (total 2,4 W max), car direction arrows ............................. 31Model with light superior to 1, 2 w (total 2,4 w max), car direction arrows ............................... 32Inspection mode ........................................................................................................................... 33Inspection limit switch ................................................................................................................. 36Fast speed inspection ................................................................................................................... 37Full load (« Non stop ») ............................................................................................................... 38Car overload ................................................................................................................................ 39Car reservation « Car priority » .................................................................................................. 40Fireman service light ................................................................................................................... 41Automatic car light time (BH07) .................................................................................................. 42

Chapter VII - Commissioning procedures ....................................................................................... 1Procedure to be followed to carry out the automatic set-up of levels ............................................... 2What to know before starting off at full speed .................................................................................. 6

To programme the slow down distance on the Vectorial Frequency drive .................................. 6To programme the thermal protection ......................................................................................... 7Address 00E details (hardware option) ....................................................................................... 7About the controller drive ............................................................................................................ 8

Parameter adjustment at full speed ................................................................................................... 9Adjustment of the synchronous speed ........................................................................................... 9Automatic adjustment of the up stopping precision ..................................................................... 9Automatic adjustment of the down stopping precision ................................................................. 9Adjustment of the direct approach precision ............................................................................... 10Automatic adjustment of the hysterisis zone ................................................................................ 10Positioning of EM magnet at top floor ......................................................................................... 10Positioning the EM magnets on the slotted tape (tape head O03-2) ............................................ 11

Parameters to be adjusted on site and conversion table ................................................................... 12Reminder of parameters to be checked and improved on site ...................................................... 12Conversion table .......................................................................................................................... 12

Frequency drive parameters, inputs / outputs and fault codes list ................................................... 17Controller parameters, inputs / outputs and fault codes list ............................................................. 39Parameters concerned the slotted tape .............................................................................................. 101Electric diagrams ............................................................................................................................... 102

Model 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 102Model 3 - 4 ................................................................................................................................... 103Model 5 ........................................................................................................................................ 104Model 6 ........................................................................................................................................ 105Model 7 ........................................................................................................................................ 106Three phases or single phase door operator, front and rear doors ............................................. 107Traction motor fan ....................................................................................................................... 108

Page 10: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:
Page 11: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER I

GENERALITIES

Page 12: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 12

HOW TO INSTALL THE CONTROLLER CABINET

SUPPORT BARfixing with 2 screws Ø 6,3 x 38 and wall plug Ø 8 (supplied).

500 mm

For resistive resistors (RR)FURTHER BASE

model2 to 6

For

Screws for fixingon the wall

Cabinet

Socket

controllerwith RR>4

For

Hinged door (Left or right)

Controller dimensions : L = 750 mm, H = 1050 mm, D = 300 mmController dimensions with a lot of Extra Items : L = 900 mm, H = 1050 mm, D = 300 mm

Separate Box for more than 4 Breaking Resistors : L = 320 mm, H =600 mm, D = 250 mm.Protection against electrical shocks : IP 31

Don’t forget than the EN-81-1 Standard § 6.3.2.1:6.3.2.1 The dimensions of machine rooms shall be sufficient to permit easy and safe working onequipment, especially the electrical equipment.In particular there shall be provided at least a clear height of 2 m at working areas, and :

a) a clear horizontal area in front of the control panels and the cabinets. This area is defined as follows :1) depth, measured from the external surface of the enclosures, at least 0,70 m ;2) width, the greater of the following values : 0,50 m or the full width of the cabinet or panel ;

b) a clear horizontal area of at least 0,50 m x 0,60 m for maintenance and inspection of moving parts atpoints where this is necessary and, if need be, manual emergency operation (12.5.1).

Page 13: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 13

CONTROLLER POSITIONAND ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (1/4)

When the machine room supports or is near a radio or television receptionaerial, do not put the controller cabinet in the aerial receiving zone (figure 1).

If you can not find a suitable place for the frequency drive cabinet, get the aerialmoved! If that is not possible, contact AUTINOR who will decide along with the buildingowner, what measures need to be taken according to the EN 12015 and EN 12016Standard for lifts, escalators and passengers conveyors.

PRÉCAUTIONS TO TAKE.

1. The power supply arrival L1, L2, L3 and Earth (Yellow/Green) must all pass throughthe same cable.

L2

L3

PE

L1

N

2. The power link between the MB32 Vector drive and the motor (11, 12, 13 + Earth) mustgo through the same cable. In order to reduce disturbances a screened cable (LIYYCYtype, minimal length of cable: 3m50) must be used, even if the motor cable ismechanically protected by a tube or metal trunking. This screening should consist of atleast one flat cable, the greater the number of flat cables the greater the efficiency of thescreening. The cable should be supple for ease of installation in the machine room andshould comply with EN 81 standards.To be completely efficient the screening must be connected at the same time to thecontroller metal casing and to the motor metal housing.In order to reduce any coupling effects, it is advisable to maximise the distance betweenthe motor cable and the three phase power supply cable, both inside and outside thecontroller; for the same reason, you should keep the cables carrying high current as farapart from those carrying low current as possible. These two types of cable should not beplaced in the same trunking, nor go through the controller casing via the same hole.

BAD !

AerialReception

GOOD !

Aerial receivingzone

AerialReception

Aerial receivingzone

Placing the frequency drive outside the aerial receiving zone

Page 14: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 14

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY PRECAUTIONS (2/4)At not time should the screening cable replace the yellow-green earthing cable.

ADVICE: In order to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility, it may be necessary to use to connect to themotor, a metal stuffing box with a screening contact allowing an efficient electrical link between theflat screening cable and the metal housing (see figure below).

If the motor terminal box is isolated, then a metal stuff box is of course useless. The screening cableshould be linked in the shortest way to the motor earth terminal block.

3. The other links between the MB32 Vector drive and the motor, i.e. .the brake (+BR and-BR), the motor thermistor (0V, STH) can run together but kept at least 10 cm from thepower cables.

EXAMPLE:

• Conventional connection :Controller:

Phase

Screened cable

cables

Yellow/Greenearthing cable

TO INSERT THE SCREENING CABLELOWER THE MOBILE PLATE

USING A SCREWDRIVER

Screening cable

11 12 13PE

Motor:

W2 U2 V2

U1 V1 W1

Screening flat cablelinked in the shortest way

to the earth terminalPhase cables

Screened cable

earthing cableYellow/Green

Terminal box

Motor earthterminal

Note: Keep the motor cable as far apart from the power cableas possible, inside as well as outside the controller.

Note: The cables should only be separated from the screeningonce inside the terminal box.

• Connection using stuff-box :

CURVED SEAL

FLAT SEAL

FLAT CABLE

TUBING

BOX WALLTERMINALSCREENING

10 cm min

SHAFT WIRING

HANGING CABLE

L1, L2, L3 + EARTH

L1, NEUTRAL

CONTROLLER M

MOTOR SCREENED CABLE11,12,13 AND EARTH + SCREENING

MOTOR THERMISTORBRAKE

POWERSUPPLY

ARRIVAL BOX

MOTOR

SCREENEDCABLEONLY

THERMISTOR,BRAKE,

ENCODER,

TRUNKING

10 cm min

INCREMENTAL

Check that the power supply arrival does not flow closeto the MB32 Vector drive and motor link.

Page 15: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 15

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY PRECAUTIONS (3/4)CONCERNING THE SET OF WIRING IN THE LANDING COLUMN SEPARATION.

CONCERNING TRAILING CABLE SEPARATION.The devices controlled by the contactors are powered by wires which go into the trailing cable

The trailing cable's other conductor wires do not transport strong currents to activate power devices, butelectrical "DATA" via weak currents. This data could be, for example, the state of the door limits necessary tocontrol the automatic doors, or the car calls.

To show you the difference in importance between the two types of current, here is an example: Certaindoor motors can use 3 amps whereas the current used for the data concerning the state of the door limits isonly 3 mA.

There is, in this typical example, a ratio of 1 to 1000.

This ratio is often even greater, especially when you consider the starting current of a power device whenit is first switched on. It is clear that the big currents will influence the little ones if care is not taken to separatethem.

IF THESE CURRENTS IN THE TRAILING CABLE ARE NOT SEPARATED:

• FALSE DATA WILL BE SENT TO THE CONTROLLER,

• THERE WILL BE GRADUAL DETERIORATION OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (ANYTHING FROM 3DAYS TO A FEW MONTHS).

THE SHORT OR MEDIUM TERM CONSEQUENCES WILL BE SOME "STRANGE" FUNCTIONING BY THECONTROLLER, EVENTUALLY CAUSING BREAKDOWNS! ! !

TO SUM UP, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CONDUCTOR WIRES FROM THE TRAILING CABLE CARRYINGSTRONG CURRENTS FOR THE RETIRING RAMP, DOOR MOTOR, BRAKING INJECTION, ANTI-CREEPS AND THECAR VENTILATION MOTOR, NOT TO MENTION THE CAR LIGHT AND SAFETY CHAIN, ARE SEPARATED FROMTHE OTHER CONDUCTORS CARRYING WEAK CURRENTS.

THE TRAILING CABLES MUST BE SEPARATED AS FAR APART AS POSSIBLE AND SHOULD BEARRANGED IN THE SHAFT AS SHOWN BELOW:

IF YOU ARE USING HALF-WAY BOXES, YOU SHOULD ALSO TAKE CARE TO SEPARATE THE WIRES.

The precautions carried out above should be taken in the controller as well. In fact, you should avoidcrossing wires in all directions behind the controller and should leave a little slack to aid maintenance.

WARNING:We recommend to separate

in the landing column,the 3 sets of wiring in 3 rows:

Lighting - Power socketsSafety lane

and Low Voltage,

in order for ease of maintenance and takingEMC* regards into account

3 SET OF WIRING

LOW VOLTAGE (Low current)

SAFETY LANE (Safety current)

LIGHTING - POWER SOCKET (High current)

* EMC : ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

ONE OR SEVERAL

TRAILING CABLE

MECANICAL ATTACHMENTS

"WEAK CURRENT"

Page 16: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 16

USE OF DIFFERENTIAL CIRCUIT BREAKERSWITH AUTINOR FREQUENCY DRIVES (4/4)

First of all as a reminder :

• The low voltage directive explicitly states that electrical lift installations are excluded fromits field of application and so the standards relating to electrical installations only appliesas far as the input terminals of the main lift installation switch (cf EN 81 § 13.1.1.2) ;

• Nevertheless the safety of all people must be ensured, and so to do this, we rely asmuch as possible on the detail of C 15-100 taking into account the imperativesconcerning lifts.

The standard C 15-100 § 532.2.1.3 states that :« Les dispositifs de protection à courant différentiel-résiduel doivent être choisis et lescircuits électriques divisés de telle manière que tout courant de fuite à la terre susceptiblede circuler durant le fonctionnement normal des appareils ne puisse provoquer la coupureintempestive du dispositif. »

AUTINOR frequency drives have a normal current leakage when loaded around 100 mA. Wetherefor recommend the Lift installation be supplied through a differential circuit breaker with adifferential current (= « sensitivity ») Iδn = 300 mA.What is more, C 15-100 states that for electrical installations cabled conform to the TTdiagrams (installations powered by the public electricity network), people should be protectedagainst indirect contacts by differential residual current circuit breaker which implies thefollowing of the relation ship which links the circuit breaker differential current Iδn to themaximum conventional voltage of the UL contact and of the earthing socket resistance :

Iδn * RA ≤ UL (NF C 15-100 § 532.2.4.2)

If the earthing socket resistance exceeds 100 Ω, the electrician may use an S typedifferential circuit breaker with a differential current of 300 mA, which will ensure protectionagainst indirect contact for an earthing socket resistance of up to 167 Ω. You shouldnevertheless ensure that a « full load » movement does not break the circuit at the wrongmoment.

Page 17: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 17

Page 18: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 18

MINIMUM CONNECTIONS NECESSARYFOR INITIAL MOVEMENT (1/4)

7

3

20V

STH

GDGM

0V0V

INS

GD

GM

Θ

1

6 810

0V

KA16

CS1KA13

0V

CS2(BG19)

BG19

BG15

KM11 KM12 KC23

6 810

VEC01

+240V CAI

CBI

KC22

Bottom8

VEC05

L1PA L2PA L3PA

FREQUENCY DRIVE TERMINAL RAIL

CONTROLLER TERMINAL RAIL

STATE OFTHE SAFETY LANETHE 3 LED'S (6, 8, 10)NEED TO BE LIT UPBEFORE THE LIFT

WILL MOVE

GreenWhite

BlackRed

To be installedin the safety lane

INCREMENTAL ENCODER

HENGSTLER

+24

0V

CAI

CBI

WHITE

GREEN

BLACK

RED

Cut the wires which are not used.Screening cable do not connect.

Wires CAI and CBI should be crossedin dependance of your configuration.

encoderIncremental

5 4

CVRS

6

FILTRE SECTEUR TRIPHASE

Modèle : 0130-20

20 A à 40°C3 x 400Vac 50 / 60Hz

Made in France

LINE

LIGNE

AUTINOR

L1'

L2'

L3'

L1

L2

L3

CHARGE

LOAD

FRV1FRV2

1S1B

1C22A

344C 6

88A

10N

L5

Device of bridging of thesafety measures of doors

L3L2

L1PEPE

1112

13

1112

13FUVE

+BR-BR

Minimum connections necessary for initial movement

Page 19: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 19

MINIMUM CONNECTIONS NECESSARYFOR INITIAL MOVEMENT (2/4)

During the construction phase, you can temporarily use the 0V, GM and GD inputs on theKM12 connector for running up and down respectively.

CONNECT AS FOLLOWS:

(See on page 18 for where to make these connections)

!WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE L1, L2, L3 POWER SUPPLY TO 11, 12, 13

OR YOU RISK DAMAGING THE TRANSISTORS.

CONNECT POINTS , , FOLLOWING THE ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY RECOMMENDATIONS AS SHOWN ON PAGE 13.

1 Connect the thermistor and/or the motor safety thermo-contact between the STHand 0V terminals on the KM11 connector

2 Temporarily bridge 0V and INS on the KC23 connector.

3The "up" and "down" push buttons on the inspection box on the car roof to theGM, GD and 0V terminals on the KM12 connector.

4 The safety circuits 1S, 6, 8 and 10 on the electromechanical terminal rail.

5The traction motor to 11, 12 ,13 on the electromechanical terminal rail and theEARTH to the earth collecting bar, as well as the brake power supply+BR & -BR

6 The power supply to L1, L2, L3 and the Earth.

7 Temporarily bridge CS1 and 0V on KA13 and possibly CS2 and 0V on KA16 ofthe BG19 board (when there are 2 door operators).

8 Connect the four wires on the incremental encoder to the KC22 (Bottom)connector on the VEC01 board.

Page 20: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 20

POWER-UP FOR INITIAL MOVEMENT (3/4)Switch on the power:

− The LEDs showing the transistors are green.

CUT THE SAFETY LANE

Please see page 26 for the description of how to use the frequency drive parameter/diagnosticcommunication device

Checking the transistor control:

1) At address 041, write 55

2) At address 041, write 00

041 TEST 55

THE LEDS BECOME RED.

VEC01

RECUP

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

041 TEST 00

THE LEDS BECOME GREEN AGAIN.

VEC01

RECUP

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

Page 21: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 21

POWER-UP FOR INITIAL MOVEMENT (4/4)

To check the capacitor voltage:

CUT THE SAFETY LANE!

To check the VEC12 current measuring device:

• Check at addresses 12A and 12E that the value is between 500 and 524. If the values are not coherent,check the connection of the K8 connector of the VEC01 board.

To check the incremental encoder connection:

• Check at address 116 on the parameter/diagnostic communication device (see page 28) that the number ofimpulses increases as you turn the rotor in the direction corresponding to up, and decreases in thedirection corresponding to down. Turn the rotor gently by hand.

If the number of impulses changes in the wrong direction, inverse the CAI and CBI wire on the KC22 (bottom)connector of the VEC01 board.

Check that the parameters are coherent (see Chapter VII Frequencydrive parameters):

RECONNECT THE SAFETY LANE!Try an up movement and then a down movement, and check that the lift starts off in the required

direction.

Possible faults:The system might come up with one or more of the following fault codes:

• 17: Phase failure or inversion of the controller.

• 102: Gap between the advised and real speed of more than 15% in Slow Speed.

• 100: Motor over-intensity.♦ Cross two of the motor phases.♦ Check that the encoder is wired correctly.

• 62: O03 tape head fault.

104 Tcont 10V

SELECT ADDRESS 104

PRESS CONTACTOR L

104 Tcont 600V

THE VOLTAGE READ IS ABOUT 600V

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Page 22: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 22

LOCATION OF TERMINAL BLOCKS

10MO

DE

* ** * **VISO *

VISO **

VEC12

4 FLOORS COLLECTIVE

To the contactors

NOTHING TO BE CONNECTED

K1 connector

To the BG18floor extension board

board

orthe BG19

2nd automatic door

K1 connector

K12 connector

UP TO 8 FLOORS

To VEC01 board

TOP

BOTTOM

TOP

BOTTOM

KC22 connector

From BG15 board

connectorSerial link

Motor currentmeasuring device

sondeTemperature

(Ex : Parameter/diagnostic tool

Towardselectro-mecanical rail

transformerTowards power supply

BG17 board

Parameter/Diagnostic

J1 connector

5 to 16 floorsExtension from

BG18 boardJ1 connector

BG19 2nd automaticdoor board

Towards the

J1 connecteur

To VEC01 boardJ1 connector

OPTION MLIft

To VEC01 board K4 connector,

To BG15 boardJ8 connector

Lift controllerconnector

Input

OutputSparetherminalK28 connector

transformerTowards power supply

MO

OU1FE1

COM3+24

0V+24

CAMSPG2

FMFD

0V

COMB24R

24R

CREP0V

24R

24RSPG4

SPG3SPG1

0V0V

+5V24R

1 3

DE

0V

THV

0VPH

K25 KP29 KP24

K26K62KC24KC29K24K23KA14K29K28

2

K13

K15K30 KC22

K12 K14

+240V CAA

CAB+24

INS/MAN/

COM1S

L

COM2VENT

COM3FR

+240V CAI

CBICCSCCL

0V

MAN

0VCAA

CABMAN

K4

0V 18V

K5

+550VF

0VF

K10

J2

K8

K9

J1

K1

J3CR

KM17 KC22 KM11 KM12 KC23

24RDEF

CL0V

STHSUSD

CABCAA

0V+24MTH 0V

GDGM

MAN0V

0VGD

GMINS

KP26

K27

KA13

KC21

KP21

KP27

KP34

KP23

KS21

KC28

KP22

EPG4

0VEDPOM

EPG3EPG2EPG1

0VFF1COI1

FCFE1FCOU1

+24SH80VZONE

PRICNSSUMHS

DEF24RCL0V

CS1

C3C2C1C0

D3D2D1M0

M3M2M1E/SX

NF3NF2NF1NF0

POS3POS2POS1POS0

KT2

10

8

6

RS

+

-19 VDC

J2

J7

C3C2C1C0

1 2

C7C6C5C4

P3P2P1P0

P7P6P5P4

3

J5

K30

RS

N70

BG15

J8

VEC01

and to tape head O03.

and from tape head

From BG15 board

O03.*

**24 / 48 V110 / 220 V

!

Page 23: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 23

LOCATION AND FUNCTION OF FUSES

SPARE FUSE

ONLY USE PROTISTORS CAPABLE OF WHITHSTANDING 600V

THE USE OF OTHER FUSES IS DANGEROUS AND COULD DAMAGETHE TRANSISTORS IF THERE IS A POWER SURGE OR SHORT CIRCUIT.

ATTENTION !!!

AND SPECIALLY CONCEIVED TO PROTECT SEMI-CONDUCTORS.

N°2N°3N°4N°5

N°6 / N°7

MODEL PROTISTOR25 A (10x38)40 A (14x51)50 A (14x51)63 A (22x58)80 A (22x58)

OPERATOR 1

L1PA-L2PA-L3PA

2A-380V dim: 8,5 x 31,5

PROTECTIONOF THE INPUT PHASESFOR THE DOOR MOTOR

DOOR 1 AND DOOR 2

RECTIFIEDCURRENTPRESENT(brake, retiring ramp,electrovalves, anti-creep ...)

YELLOW LED

FU1

5A-250V dim: 5 x 20 TIME LAG

ELECTRONICAND SIGNALPOWER SUPPLYPROTECTION

FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20 QUICK ACTING

COMB, PROTECTION WIREFOR CALL PANEL BUTTONS

5A-250V dim: 5x20 TIME LAG

for FU2 & FU3 ifType 1 transformer

for FU1 & FU7.

FU1

5A-250V dim: 5 x 20 TIME LAGPROTECTIONBOXBH07

FU7

5A-250V dim: 5 x 20 TIME LAG

PROTECTIONCURRENTRECTIFIED

TYPE A

for FU15A-250V dim: 5x20 TIME LAG

SPARE FUSE

BG15

BG22VEC01

DC CURRENTPROTECTION

(brake, retiring ramp, electrovalves ...)

T1=5A / T2= 2A

250V dim: 5 X 20

FU2, FU3

TIME LAG

transformerFor type 1 or 2

FU4SAFETY LANE

POWER SUPPLYPROTECTION

2A-250 V dim: 5 X 20 TIME LAG

5A-250 V dim: 5 X 20 TIME LAG

FU1

POWER SUPPLYEQUIPMENT

PROTECTION

(MAIN BOARD)

ELECTRONIC

CURRENT PRESENTRECTIFIED

RED LED

2A-250V dim: 5x20 TIME LAG

for FU2 & FU3 ifType 2 transformer

for FU4.SPARE FUSE

PROTECTIONSAFETY LANE

for FU2 and FU52,5A-250V dim: 5x20

SPARE FUSE

QUICK ACTING

FuVe

PROTECTIONFANCOOLINGTRANSISTOR

0,5A-250 V dim: 5 X 20 QUICK ACTING

FU1 (2A)

SIGNAL POWER SUPPLYPROTECTION

ELECTRONIQUE AND

2A-250 V dim: 5 X 20 TIME LAG

VEC12

If you should replace the motor current

It is IMPERATIVE to followedthe same path wire

measuring device VEC12

MEASURING DEVICEMOTOR CURRENT

POWER CONTACTORS

BRAKE CONTACTOR

The position of FU+ is dependingof the V.F. Model

FU+DC PROTECTION BY PROTISTOR

DRIVE MODEL.(SEE TABLE BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE

3 PHASE NETWORKCURRENT FILTER

E2ROM(PARAMETERS)

E2ROM(FAULTS)

NOTCH

MICROPROCESSOR

PROGRAMMEfor FU12A-250V dim: 5x20 TIME LAG

SPARE FUSE

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P

6A 4AL2P

2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -

380 V dim: 6 X 32

RR

R

!

FU5

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20 QUICK ACTING

24RB, PROTECTION WIREFOR CALL PANEL BUTTONS

Page 24: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 24

LOCATION OF LED, JUMPERS AND RELAYOF THE BG15 BOARD

reference

E2rom

referenceController

Program

referenceBoard

TEST

SW9SW10SW11SW12

SW4 SW5

MOY

SW1SW2

CS1

6810

CL

DEFCOMB CREP

DEFE1OU1

GV/PVL

TEST

SW7CA CB

D

TEST

0V 24V

BG15

Page 25: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 25

FUNCTION OF THE SW1, SW2, SW4-SW5, SW7, SW9-SW10-SW11 & SW12 JUMPERS OF THE BG15 BOARD

SW1 When the jumper is present, 24V increase the mass relays.

SW2 When the jumper is present, 0V increases the mass relays.

SW3 DOES NOT EXIST.

SW5123

SW4123

SW5123

SW4123

When the jumpers are in the lower (position 1-2) the controller isprogrammed for use with the P202U tape-head.

When the jumpers are in the upper (position 2-3) the controller isprogrammed for use with the O03 tape-head or the I.L.S proximity switches.

SW6 DOES NOT EXIST.

SW7123

SW7123

When the jumper is in the lower (position HYDR) the controller isprogrammed for use as a HYDRAULIC.

When the jumper is in the upper (position TRAC) the controller isprogrammed for use as a TRACTION.

SW8 DOES NOT EXIST.

SW9SW10SW11SW12

1 2 3

SW9SW10SW11SW12

1 2 3

Place the jumper to the right (position 2-3) for a single button - 2 to 8 floorsusing on the BG15 board only.

Place the jumper to the left (position 1-2) for all other situations.

Page 26: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 26

FREQUENCY DRIVE PARAMETER / DIAGNOSTICCOMMUNICATION DEVICE

This chapter contains information which will allow you to adapt the VECTORequipment to the specific conditions of the lift on which it is installed.

This adaptation is controlled by parameters, which you can modify according to your needsusing the removable parameter / diagnostic communication device as described below in theparagraph Accessing the parameters.

The parameters are memorised in a particular type of chip called an EEPROM 1 (orE2PROM) which keeps the information even when the equipment is switched off.

Each parameter is linked to an abridged name and an address which corresponds tothe position at which it is memorised in the EEPROM chip.

Accessing the parametersAs mentioned above, you can see and modify the parameters using the

parameter/diagnostic communication tool; this consists of a 16 characters LCD display withfour push buttons, which is connected to the VEC01 board by a standard Male/Female Sub-D 9 pt cable.

1 EEPROM stands for Electrically Erasable Programable Read Only Memory.

AUTINOR

TO MODIFY THE VALUES

THOUSANDSHUNDREDS TENS

UNITS

RESET TO ZERO

TO VALIDATE THE DATA

VEC01

Standard Male/FemaleSub-D9 pt cable

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Page 27: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 27

TO ACCESS THE PARAMETERS AND THE INPUT-OUTPUT INFORMATION

Each time you press 1 the value shown will increase by 1.Each time you press 10 the value shown will increase by 10.Each time you press 100 the value shown will increase by 100.Each time you press 1000 the value shown will increase by 1000.

CHOOSING THE LANGUAGE

Power-up the equipment, the display shows:

VEC-Vxx xx/xx/xx

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

THEN 000 V0 0,150m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

The parameter/diagnostic communication device is preset to the language of the destinationcountry.

There are four options which appear at address 027 as follows: FRANCE, ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, ESPAGNOL.

Press twice button 10,then 7 times button 1,

for address 027

Press both MODIF buttonsat the same time

Press button 1 and choose therequired language.

027 Country FRANCE

2 x 7 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MDF Country FRANCE

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MDF Country ENGLISH

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Register the required language by pressing both VALID buttons at the same time

027 Country ENGLISH

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

The language in our example is English

Page 28: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 28

Other example:

VIEWING THE INCREMENTAL ENCODER IMPULSES (SEE PAGE 21).

TRANSFER OF THE SETTINGS INCLUDED IN THE VVVF TOWARD THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL.

Reset the display to address 000by pressing the CLEAR buttons

simultaneously

Display address 116 usingbuttons 100, 10 and 1

000 V0 0,150m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

116 Codeur 0635

6 x1 x1 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

The value displayed at address116

increases when the rotor turnsin the upwards direction

The value displayed at address116

decreases when the rotor turnsin the downwards direction

116 Codeur 0975

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

116 Codeur 0328

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Press the 2 end buttons to make« READ PARAMETERS »

appear.

Validate by pressing the« VALID » buttons

..... Transfert

Press the 2 end buttonsto return to normal mode

READ PARAMETERS

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

READ Adr.

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

F8xx

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

000 V0 0,150m/s

Note: You can memorise in the E²ROM of the box, the parameters of 4 VVVF door drive, respectively at theaddresses 00, 40, 80 or C0. For that, press the 2 end buttons than press « MODIF » button and modify theright number to 00, 40, 80 or C0 with the 10 button than press « VALID » to validate.

READ PARAMETERS

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

40 Octets < - 00

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

x 8

40 Octets < - 0040

80 C0

Ex: Copy the VVVF parameters ataddress 80 in the box

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

READ Add. F8xx

Page 29: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 29

TRANSFER OF THE SETTINGS INCLUDED IN THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL TOWARD THE VVVF.

TO REMIND YOURSELF OF THE ADDRESS

TO CHANGE THE PARAMETERS IN DECIMAL MODE

! WARNING: this operation overwrite on the parameters included in the VVVF door drive !

Press the 2 end buttons,you read,

« READ PARAMETERS »

Display« WRITE PARAMETERS »

using button 1

Validate by pressing the« VALID » button

..... Transfert

Press the 2 end buttons toreturn to normal mode

READ PARAMETERS

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

WRITE PARAMETERS

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

x 1

WRITE Ad.

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

F8xx

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

000 V0 0,150m/s

Note: You can transmit the VVVF parameters in the E²ROM of the box at addresses 00, 40, 80 or C0 in the boxVEC03. For that, press the 2 end buttons, than on the button 1 to pass on « WRITE » mode than press the 2« MODIF » buttons and than modify the right number at 00, 40, 80 or C0 with the 10 button than press« VALID » to validate.

READ PARAMETERS

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

WRITE PARAMETER

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

40 Octets - > 00

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

x 8

40 Octets - > 0040

80 C0

Ex: Copy the Parametersmemorised at address 80in the box to the VVVF

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

READ Add. F8xx

If you forget the address you are changing, or the previous valueshown, just press both MODIF buttons. 004 V2 2,00m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

After selecting the required language (see previous page) you can access the parameters andchange them if required.

Reset the display by pressingboth CLEAR buttons

at the same time

To change the V2 speed forexample, display address 004

by pressing button 1

Press bothMODIF buttons

at the same time

000 V0 0,150m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

004 V2 2,00m/s

4 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MDF V2 2,00m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Press button 10 5 times to obtainthe desired speed

Register the new speed bypressing both VALID buttons at

the same time

MDF V2 2,50m/s

5 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

004 V2 2,50m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Page 30: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 30

TO CHANGE THE PARAMETERS IN SEGMENT MODE

You can access the options using segments and change them if so desired.Seg0 : IG, Seg1 : NOBAND, Seg2 : BATTERY, Seg3 : MLI,

Seg4 : RETSEC, Seg5 : APPDIR, Seg6 : D65°, Seg7 : ML220VReset the display by pressing

both CLEAR buttonsat the same time

Display address 00Eby pressing button 1

Press both MODIF buttonsat the same time

000 V0 0,150m/s

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

00E Opt 00000000

11 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MDF Bt1 0

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Press button 10to obtain the required segment

example: Direct approach.

Press button 1to activate segment 5.

Register the new data in thememory by pressing both VALID

buttons at the same time.

MDF Bt5 0AP-DIR

5 x

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

1 x

MDF Bt5 1AP-DIR

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

MDF Bt5 1AP-DIR

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

Page 31: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 31

CONTROLLER PARAMETER / DIAGNOSTICCOMMUNICATION DEVICE

Indicatorparameteraccess

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Figure 1 Position of the sliding switches for parameter mode

BG15BG17

Figure 2 Position of the communication device

Page 32: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 32

THE PARAMETERS AND THEIR MYSTERIES

This chapter contains information which will allow you to adapt theMB32 VECTOR equipment to the specific conditions of the lift on which it is installed.

This adaptation is controlled by parameters, which you can modify according to your needsusing the removable parameter / diagnostic2 communication device as described below inthe paragraph Accessing the parameters.

The parameters are memorised in a particular type of memory called an EEPROM (orE2PROM) which keeps the information even when the equipment is switched off.

Each parameter is linked to an abridged name and an address which corresponds to theposition at which it is memorised in the EEPROM chip. As computers are strange creatures,the addresses are expressed in a particular numbering system, called an hexadecimalsystem (= a numbering system in base 16), which is made up of numbers (from 0 to 9) aswell as letters (A to F). This peculiarity aside, you only need to consider the address as amarker (think of the game of battleships).

Accessing the parametersAs mentioned above, you can see and modify the parameters using the

parameter/diagnostic communication tool; this consists of a BG17 circuit board, which isplugged into the BG15 (figure 2, page 31).

The BG17 board is made up of 2 displays with 7 segments, 2 push buttons and 2 slidingswitches (figure 1, page 31).

To access the parameters, the left-hand sliding switch must be at the bottom; thisposition is shown as PAR (as in PARAMETER) on the board.

When the sliding switch is in this position, the decimal point on the right-hand display lightsup to remind you that you are looking at or modifying the parameters.

2 Note for those used to using our previous manuals :The term "parameter/diagnostic communication device" replaces the old term "communication tool" toavoid any risk of confusion with the equipment used to communicate (directly or by telephone link) withthe computer system (telesurveillance and/or telediagnostic).

Page 33: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 33

DISPLAY MODES

Depending on the information to be displayed, the MB32 VECTOR uses the mostappropriate method of showing the information.

Digit Mode

The digit mode is useful to read or programme times, or the number of floors, or the numberof doors for example.

Example: If we have 2 door operators, we program 02 at address 03.

Segment Mode

The segment mode uses the individual vertical segments on the display as shown below.

This mode is useful to activate or deactivate different functions:Example: To activate the "flashing direction arrows" option, segment 5 at

address 08 must be ON.

The segment mode is also useful to view the state of inputs and outputs:Example: To check that the C0 input (car call to level 0) is correctly read by

the MB32 VECTOR, you need to look at segment 0 at address00.

To change from digit to segment mode and vice-versa, slide the ADR-DON-MODIF switchto ADR/DON and press both buttons at the same time, and release.

Segment 6 Segment 5

Segment 7 Segment 4

Segment 3 Segment 0

Segment 2 Segment 1

Page 34: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 34

To change the address or to view the inputs, outputs and parameters

To remind yourself of the current address

Check that the ADR/DON-MODIF switch is on ADR/DON.

ADR/DON

MODIF 1

Scroll to the desired address (eg 03) by pressing the push buttons below the display.

Press either button and the address will be displayed. Each time you press a button the valuedisplayed will be increased by 1.RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17Press the right hand button 10

times to change

from address 09 to address 03

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Leave the buttons for 1 second, and the contents of the selected address will be displayedindefinitely.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17 1 second later ...

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

If you forget the address you are at,

Slide the ADR/DON-MODIF switch to MODIF.

ADR/DON

MODIF

1

Then slide it back to ADR/DON. This will show you the address for 1second, and then the contents.

ADR/DON

MODIF 2

Page 35: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 35

TO CHANGE THE PARAMETERS

Check that the RAM-PAR switch is to PAR.

RAM

PAR

A) In digit mode

Go to the parameter address as explained on the page before (e.g. 03).

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17 1 second later ...

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Slide the ADR/DON-MODIF switch to MODIF.

ADR/DON

MODIF

2

Use the push buttons to increase/decrease to the new value (e.g. 02).

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

3

Push once on the right-handbutton

to change the value from 01 to02.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Register the new value by pushing and releasing both buttonsat the same time.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

4

Slide the ADR/DON-MODIF switch back to ADR/DON. Address 03 willshow followed by its value 02.

ADR/DON

MODIF 5

Page 36: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 36B) In segment mode

Go to the parameter address as previously explained (e.g. 08).

If the contents are displayed as a figure (82 in the example below), check that the right handswitch is in the upper position, and press both buttons at the same time; this will pass you intosegment mode. The current address will be displayed followed by the contents shown insegments. If not pass onto stage .

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

1'

1

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFBG17

Press

and release ...

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

ADR/DON

MODIF

RAM

PAR

ECRITBG17

TOPROW

BOTTOMROW

• The left-hand button acts on the TOP ROW ofsegments (4 to 7),

• The right-hand button acts on the BOTTOMROW of segments (0 to 3).

Slide the ADR/DON-MODIF switch to MODIF.

In our example we want to activate the "flashing direction arrow"function (address 08 segment 5).

We have to light up segment 5 while keeping on all other segments intheir present state

ADR/DON

MODIF

2

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Seg 5flashing direction arrow

2

Pressonce

...

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

2

Seg 5flashing direction arrow

Pressonce

...

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

BG17

Seg 5flashing direction arrow

Repeat stages and

shown on the previouspage.

Page 37: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 37

CONCERNING THE ILLUSTRATIONS (1/2)

Each connection that you will have to carry out is accompanied by an explication andan illustration. The illustrations try to summarise in one page all the important elementswhich will be necessary for you to carry out the corresponding function; i.e.:

• The PARAMETERS which you need to check or adjust,• The CONNECTIONS themselves,• The corresponding VARIABLES or INPUTS/OUTPUTS,• The CONSEQUENCES of any possible ANOMALY connected with the function in

question.

In order to achieve this goal (or at least to try to) this manual uses the following symbols:RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRIT

OU View of the parameter/diagnostic tool when you should check ormodify a parameter's value. Note that the push buttons areshown in this case. The figure also specifies the position of thesliding switches on the BG17 board.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

View of the parameter/diagnostic tool when you should check thestate or value of a variable. Note that the push buttons are notshown in this case. The figure also specifies the position of thesliding switches on the BG17 board.

XXXXXXAdd. YYSeg. Z

Name, address and possible segment number, for the variable orparameter shown in one of the 2 preceding figures.

You should check the value or state of the parameter indicated,and of course changes the parameter if it does not correspond tothe value or state indicated.

You should adjust the value of the parameter indicated. The unitused (second, 1/10 second, millimetre, etc...) and the base(decimal or hexadecimal) are displayed.Note: You will find all useful information about the bases and the

conversions between bases in the chapter dedicated tothe parameters.

Don't worry, be happy!The parameter shown is at the right value, or the variable shownreflects a normal operation of the function in question.

Now worry!The parameter shown is the wrong value, or the variable shownreflects a breakdown of the function in question.

Page 38: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter I - page 38

CONCERNING THE ILLUSTRATIONS (2/2)

Keep an eye on this!This symbol indicates that you can see the state of the function inquestion. It is used instead of the "smilies" when there is nocorrect or incorrect state strictly speaking. This would be the casefor example with the contact authorising movements when in fullspeed inspection mode.

Fault!The wiring of the current function has caused a fault code to bedisplayed on the parameter/diagnostic tool.

Permanent fault!This symbol accompanies the above symbol, when the wiring ofthe current function causes the permanent stop of the lift. In thiscase, the only way of putting the lift into service is by anintervention of you (or by cutting the power supply).Fault code!The fault code when there is a problem with the wiring of thecurrent function.

Page 39: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

WARNING!Every intervention, connecting, on site maintenance,in the controller must justified a systematic cut of the

main machine room switch provided by theEN 81 standard § 13.1.1.1.

CHAPTER II

INSTALLATION&

CONNECTINGTHE SAFETY

Page 40: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter II - page 2

CONNECTING THE SAFETY LANEWITH AUTOMATIC DOORS AND MACHINE ROOM INSPECTION BOX

GOVERNOR

PULLEY

(§ 9.9.11.3)

RETURN

SWITCH

Vn > 2.5 m/s. (§ 9.6.1.b)IN THE COMPENSATION ROPESCONTACT OF THE TENSION

PIT BOTTOMSWITCH(§ 5.7.3.4)

SHAFT EMERGENCYEXIT(§ 5.2.2.2.2)

(§ 8.11.5.2)+ SECURITY I.G.H.(Art. GH33)

EMERGENCY DOOR

CAR STOP BUTTON(§ 14.2.2.2)

CAR SAFETYTRAP SWITCH(§ 8.12.5.2)

EMERGENCY

(§ 8.15.b)CAR ROOFSTOP ON

BOTTOM OVERTRAVEL LIMIT(§ 10.5.3.1.b.2)

(§ 10.5.3.1.b.2)

TOP OVERTRAVEL LIMIT

TRANSMISSION OF THECAR POSITION TO THE

(§ 10.5.2.3.b)FINAL LIMIT SWITCH

OVERSPEEDGOVERNOR

(§ 9.9.11.1)TRIPPING

(§ 9.9.11.2)

OVERSPEEDGOVERNOR

RELEASE

BUFFER(§ 10.4.3.4)

DISSIPATION

PULLEY ROOMSTOP

(§ 6.4.5)

POWER SUPPLYSAFETY LANE

(§ 14.1.1.3)PROTECTION

CONTACT(§ 8.9.2), (§ 7.7.6.2)

(§ 7.7.4)

CAR GATELOCKS

(§ 5.4.3.2.2)(§ 7.7.3.1)

LANDING

(§ 9.8.8)

SAFETYGEAR SWITCH

INSPECTION

P 82.211 (§ 5.7.2.2.b)DECRET 95-826 (§ I.1.1)

FINAL LIMIT SWITCH

GV/PV DE MO

Maxi250V

Visa

Normalisation

Date

Responsable

10 / 07 / 97H. MARY

MO DE 10

( K12 )

L

S

COM1

( K14 )S

LR 63 R 62

R 68 R 67

MAN/

GM GD

INSPECTION NORMAL

INS

MO DEPVGV

( K28 )( K29 )

( K30 )RS RS

LS

LS

1S 1BRSCV 2A FRV121C 4 4C3FRV2 8A 1086

OPTION

DISCONNECTIONSWITCH

SAFETY LANE

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL RAIL

BG15MAIN BOARD

VEC01VECTOR FREQUENCY DRIVE

MACHINE ROOM

(§ 14.2.1.4)

INSPECTIONBOX

STOP ININSPECTION BOX

INSPECTION BOX(§ 14.2.1.3)

ISOLATINGTERMINALBLOCKS

Used

Not used

GDGM

5

If you haven't

the Terminal

a Doors

schunt

Security BridgeBoard,

5 & 6

MACHINE ROOMINSPECTION BOX

SHUNT 2A & 3

IN ABSENCE OF

FU4 - BG22

Page 41: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter II - page 3

INSTRUCTION FOR CONNECTING ANY DEVICESTO THE SAFETY LANE

RSCV

PE

0 V

Protection

CV & RS : HINGED TERMINALS TO TEST THEINSULATION OF THE SAFETY LANE

250 V

SAFETY LANE

2 SEPARATE WIRES

MAKE SURE THAT ALL OF THE TERMINALS

ARE CORRECTLY TIGHTENED !

1 2

3

DOORCLOSED

CONTACTS

PRIMARYSAFETY

DOORLOCKED

CONTACTS

Note : To make this diagram clearer, the electronicinterfaces and the controller have been omitted.

(BG15 Main board)

2

106 8

68

10R R R Relays

(K30)

Contactors

RSRS

CONTACTS

Connection of the interfaces to he lift’s safety lane

1 The 0 V of the secondary winding of the transformer which powers the safetylane must only be connected to the CV hinged terminal, by a wire whosethe colour is neither green and yellow, nor blue.

Only the hinged terminal mentioned above should carry the label CV; noother terminal in the controller should have this label.

2 With the exception of movement contactors (connected to the controllerrelays) ALL devices (contactors, electronic interfaces) with a pole connectedto the safety lane, must have their other pole connected uniquely to the RShinged terminal (Reference Securities), by a wire whose the colour isneither green and yellow, nor blue.

3 The hinged terminals RS and CV must never be wired together; they mustbe linked to the protection conductor PE by 2 separate wires, whosecolours must be neither green and yellow, nor blue.

Page 42: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter II - page 4

MEASUREMENT OF THE INSULATION OF THE SAFETY CHAINEN 81 standard § 13.1.3 a), state that the minimum insulation resistance of the safety chain shall

be 500 000 Ω 1:

13.1.3 Insulation resistance of the electrical installation (CENELEC HD 384.6.61 S1)

The insulation resistance shall be measured between each live conductor and earth.

Minimum values of insulation resistance shall be taken from table 5.

Nominal circuit voltageV

Test voltage (D.C.)V

Insulation resistanceMΩ

SELV 250 ≥ 0,25≤ 500 500 ≥ 0,5> 500 1000 ≥ 1,0

When the circuit includes electronic devices, phase and neutral conductors shall be connectedtogether during measurement.In order to facilitate the measurement of the insulation resistance of the safety chain ask by EN 81-1Annex D § D.2 f) 1) for electric lifts and EN 81-2 Annex D § D.2 e) 1) for hydraulic lifts, AUTINORcontrollers are provided with switching terminals named CV and RS.

These two are Weidmüller model WTR 2.5, reference 101110 which electrical characteristics,according IEC 947-7-1 are:

For an easy work, the terminals are installed close together on the electromechanical rail and eachterminal have a yellow switching lever; when the two levers are in the off position, all elements of thecontroller related to the safety chain are disconnected from the earth.

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO ELECTRONICS, PUT THE LEVERS OF THE 2 TERMINALS CV AND RS INTHE OFF POSITION BEFORE MEASURING INSULATION!

1 These values are the same to those indicated in table 61 A of standard NF C 15-100, identical to the values

indicated in publication CEI 364-6, not yet harmonised on the level of CENELEC (but which were the subjectof the project of harmonisation PrHD 384-6 in Mars 1990).

Tension 500 V, Intensity 16 A, Section 2,5 mm²

w2

L1L2

L3

U1V1

W1

U2V2

FactoryWiring

N

CVRS

CV & RS : SWITCHING TERMINALS FORINSULATION OF THE SAFETY CHAIN

EARTH CONNECTION BAR

(EXAMPLE OF ELECTROMECHANICAL RAIL)

2 switchinglevers

CVRS

Measurement of the insulation resistance of the safety chain: example for MB32 controller.

Page 43: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter II - page 5

CONNECTION OF THE DOORS SAFETY CONTACTSBETWEEN 6 AND 10 (1/2)

Door

ContactClosing Level mLevel n

88A

106

Door closing contact and/orlocking of the hinged doors (*)

(*) The EN 81Norm (§ 7.7.4.2) authorizethe using of a unique contact

for the landing in case ofsimultaneaous mechanic training

of the car and landing doors

In case of Car and Landing Automatics doors Connecting

88A

106

Door

ContactClosing

Door locking contactsof the hinged doors

Door closing contactsof the hinged doors

In case of hinged doors and automatic car door

Page 44: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter II - page 6

CONNECTION OF THE DOORS SAFETY CONTACTSBETWEEN 6 AND 10 (2/2)

Door closing contacts and/orlocking of the hinged doors (*)

Door closing contactsof the hinged doors

Contacts of thehinged doors

Leveln

Levelm

Leveln

Levelm

Levelm

Leveln

88A

106

LockingDoor

Door

ContactClosing

(*) The EN 81Norm (§ 7.7.4.2) authorizethe using of a unique contact

for the landing in case ofsimultaneaous mechanic training

of the car and landing doors

In case of mixed service automatic car door,hinged doors or automatic at some levels

88A

106

Door locking contactsof the hinged doors

Door closing contactsof the hinged doors

In case of hinged door without car door (flush shaft)

Page 45: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER III

INSTALLATION&

CONNECTINGIN MACHINE ROOM

Page 46: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 2

CONNECTING OF MACHINE ROOM

ThermostatMotor

thermo-contactSafety

indicatorIn use

indicatorFault

BridgePhase

fail

TCSGM

GD MAN/

* OPTION

*

24V / 1,2W

KC22

Main board

VEC01

+24 CAI CBI0V

Brake

Input voltage220 or 380 V

TractionMotor

L1L2L3N

L1 L2 L3-BR+BR1311 12

M3~

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

(bottom)

MAIN BOARD BG15

Incrementalencoder

INCREMENTAL ENCODER

HENGSTLER

+24

0V

CAI

CBI

WHITE

GREEN

BLACK

RED

Cut the wires which are not used.Screening cable do not connect.

Wires CAI and CBI should be crossedin dependance of your configuration.

FILTER

ScreenedCable

BH08θ

L1L3 L2

RAILELECTROMECHANICAL

RAILELECTROMECHANICAL

K62 KM11 KM12 KM17

controlof the ventilation

Thermal

departureDelayed

PH THV0V STH 0V CLSUSD DEF 24R GD MAN 0VGM MTH 0V

L2P

L1P

L3P

KT1L2P

L1PKT2

+19.5V

-19.5VBG22

KT2+19 V

-19 V

Page 47: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 3

MOTOR SCREENING CABLE

RECAV1RE positioning in

speed V1?Add. 08

Seg. 7 ON

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

YCONNECTION

L1L2

L3

Motor

terminalearth

11

12

13

L S

W2

U2

V2

U1

V1

W1

Star connectionMotor 220 V / 380 V Mains 380 V

CONTROLLER:

Phase

Screened cable

cables

Yellow/Greenearthing cable

TO INSERT THE SCREENING CABLELOWER THE MOBILE PLATE

USING A SCREWDRIVER

Screening cable

11 12 13PE

Note: Keep the motor cable as far apart from the power cable aspossible, inside as well as outside the controller.

MOTOR:

W2 U2 V2

U1 V1 W1

Screening flat cablelinked in the shortest way

to the earth terminalPhase cables

Screened cable

earthing cableYellow/Green

Terminal box

Motor earthterminal

Note: The cables should only be separated from the screeningonce inside the terminal box.

Connectin of traction motor MLIft

Page 48: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 4

MOTOR VENTILATIONDETECTION BY THERMO-CONTACT

BG15

THV

K62

THV0V

Input

FactoryConnected

Output

FreeTerminal

TCV1S

θ

97

98

thermal protectionFrom relay of

Motor ventilation command -Motor over heating Detection by

thermo-contact - Thermal controlof the ventilation

Connection diagram« Chapter VII

Electric diagrams »

THVFan THermistor

Add. 0dSeg. 4

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Viewing the fan thermistor state

DEF

BG15

Consequences of the ventilation motor starting

Page 49: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 5

THERMAL PROTECTION OF THE MOTOR & CONTROLOF THE MACHINE ROOM TEMPERATURE

RESISTANCECTP

MOTORTRACTION

TEMPERATUREMACHINE ROOM

KM11TCS

STH

0V

BG15

θ

θ

Motor protection againstoverloads: Connection of

embedded thermistorand /or thermo-contact & controlof the machine room temperature

by thermo-contact

STHTHermic probe

Add. 12Seg. 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Viewing motor thermal protection state or thermic probe state

DEF

BG15

Consequences of an over heating of the motor or machine room

Page 50: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 6

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL OPERATION (1/2)

OptManHoming control

option?Add. 07Seg. 4

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15GD

GM

0V

MAN

GD

GM

MAN

34

22A

4C

FREVD FREVM

1C1B

1S

KM12

GDGM

0VMAN

Emergency

Normal

Rappel

1 2 3

1

2

3

4

Connection of the emergency electrical switches.

MINIBLOCEmergencyoperation

Add. FFSeg. 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

MAN

Viewing of emergency electrical operation

Page 51: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 7

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL OPERATION (2/2)

EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 81-1Notices, markings and operatinginstructions15.1 General provisionsAll labels, notices, markings and operatinginstructions shall be indelible, legible andreadily understandable (if necessary aided bysigns or symbols). They shall be untearable,of durable material, placed in a visibleposition, and written in the language of thecountry where the lift is installed (or, ifnecessary, in several languages).

§ 15.4.3 In the machine room, thereshall be detailed instructions to be followed inthe event of lift breakdown, particularlyconcerning the use of the device for manualor electrical emergency movement, and theunlocking key for landing doors.

Emergency electrical operation switches box

MAN, GM & GDEmergency operation

UpDownAdd. 0C

Seg. 4, 2 & 1

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFGDGM

MAN

Viewing of emergency electrical operation switches

DEF

BG15

Consequences of simultaneity of emergency electrical operation and inspection operation

Page 52: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 8

VIEWING OF THE UNLOCKING ZONE

12V - 0,5 / 1,2 AhLife cycle of battery

is between 5 and 7 years

BOARD CHARGERBATTERY

Input

FactoryConnected

Output

Freeterminal

K37

12P

0V

N57

KS15

+-

+ -

StandardEN 81.2 § 12.9.3

Viewing of the position of the car in unlocking zone

LN

K17

P309

220V Supply Battery charger

FU1

emergency powerProtection of

0,5A 250V dim: 5 X 20QUICK ACTING

against overcurrent

VZAS

Magnet only in the case of emergency power

Viewing of the unlocking zone in emergency power.

Page 53: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 9

DELAYED DEPARTURE

SUSD0V

CONTACTDEPARTURE

DELAYED

KM11BG15

Connection of the delayeddeparture contact.

SUSDDelayed

departureAdd. 0ESeg. 2

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Viewing of the delayed departure

DEF

BG15

Consequence of the delayed departure

Page 54: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 10

FAULT LIGHT (INDICATOR)

123

1112 14

22 21 24

BG15

DEF24R

FAULT LIGHT24V

KM11

CONSUMPTION

IN MACHINE ROOMOUTPUT "DEF" (KM11)

CONSUMPTION

ON LANDINGOUTPUT "DEF" (KP22)

WARNING !!!

+

100 mA=

MAXIKP22

DEF

24R

If + of 60 mAper light

KM11

FAULT LIGHT24V

P217

Connection of the fault light

DEFFault light

Add. 15Seg. 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Viewing of the fault light

DEF

BG15

Consequences of the fault light

Page 55: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter III - page 11

INTERCOM

2 41 3

2PUSH BUTTON "TO SPEAK"

THE CAR AND THE MACHINE ROOMIN PHONIC LIAISON BETWEEN

4PUSH BUTTON "TO SPEAK"

THE CAR AND THE FIRE LANDING. IN PHONIC LIAISON BETWEEN

1

INTERCOM SWITCHED ON BETWEETHE CAR AND THE MACHINE ROOMTo respect the standardEN 81-1 § 14.2.3.5

3FIREMAN SERVICE CONTACTSWITCH INTERCOMBETWEEN THE CARAND THE FIRE LANDING.

FREE TERMINAL

MACHINE ROOMLOUDSPEAKER P266

P309

K17

LN

POWER SUPPLY 220VBATTERY CHARGER

K37

12P0V

+

_P310

K39 KM14

0V

HPMEPM

12PITM

KC30

0VHPCHPP

KP31

EPP0V

IPP

12P0V

0V

BG15

KP26 0V

POM

VOLUME CONTROLEINTERCOM

FIRE LANDINGLOUDSPEAKER P266

CARLOUDSPEAKER P266

Page 56: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER IV

INSTALLATION&

CONNECTINGIN SHAFT

Page 57: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 2

FIXING THE SLOTTED-TAPE BRACKETS

M8 x 20

2 x M12 x 30

2 x M8 x 20

M62 x M8 x 20

2 x M8 x 20

M8 x 20

4 x M5 x 15

PL

Page 58: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 3

FIXING THE BRACKETS FOR CONTROLOF THE DOOR-ZONE

Page 59: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 4

POSITION OF THE DOOR-ZONE P01 SENSOR OR PROXIMITYSWITCHES (I.L.S.) AND TAPE HEAD O03 SELECTOR

Position of door-zone P01 sensors and tape-head O03 selector

Position of proximity switches (I.L.S) door-zone sensors and tape-head O03 selector

Page 60: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 5

POSITION OF THE VANES FOR DOOR-ZONE P01 SENSORSIN CASE OF DOORS OPEN MOVEMENTS

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLING

HIGHESTLEVEL L

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 2

LEVEL L-1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL L

DOOR- ZONELEVEL L-1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 2

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 0

ZONE

TAPE-HEADP01

Page 61: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 6

POSITION OF THE MAGNETS FORTHE DOOR-ZONE READ BY PROXIMITY SWITCHES

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDDOWN LEVELLINGZONE

SLOW SPEEDUP LEVELLING

HIGHESTLEVEL L

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 2

LEVEL L-1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL L

PROXIMITYSWITCHES

DOOR- ZONELEVEL L-1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 2

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 1

DOOR- ZONELEVEL 0

ZONE

Page 62: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 7

DOOR SECURITY BRIDGE BOARD RELEVELLINGPRE-OPENING BOARD

VISUALISATION OF THE DOOR-ZONE (N62)

6E

to the 6terminal

electromechanical

ISO

NormeEN 81.2 § 12.9.3

From the safety

P309K37 terminal

battery charger board

C

B

A

SH8

KC32

KS7

KS20

Visualisation of the relay state

KS15 Visualisation of the presenceof the car in a door-zoneonly in case of battery supply

ZONE

RZONE

Input

Factoryconnected

Output

Freeterminal

KS19

Tape-headfor B zone

+-ab

Proximity switchfor B door-zone

P01

SW2

OR+24

0VCAZB

+ -+ -

Visualisation of the presence

only in case of battery supplyof the car in a unlocking zone

VZAS

N62C

On site controlswitch

NormeEN 81 § D.2 b)

The relay never sticks

The relay always sticks

Normal position

SW3'A' relay command

SW4'B' relay command

SW2

SW1

KS12

CAZACAZA-

CAZA+

+240V

SH8

RZONERKISO

From the MainboardKS21 terminal

+-ab

P01

ZOMIOR

SW1KS13

INS2

INS

5INS1

Normal Insp

INS2

5E/5S

KS14

Tape-headfor A zone

Proximity switchfor A door-zone

to the 10terminal

electromechanical

Visualisation of the presenceof the car in a door-zone

Page 63: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter IV - page 8

DOOR SECURITY BRIDGE BOARD RELEVELLINGPRE-OPENING BOARD

VISUALIZATION OF THE DOOR-ZONE (N57)

For each N57 you can find attached a specific documentation (Directive relating to lift(95/16/EC) Annex 1 § 6.1.) concerning this safety component.

Visualisationof the relay state

KS7 /

KS10 /

10

KS4 /

KS15

+ - + -

KS2 /

+240V

SH8RZONE

RKISO

KS13

«

VZAS

NormeEN 81.2 § 12.9.3

N57A

A

B

C

SH8

6E

KC32

KS17

KS12KS3 /

CAZBCAZACAZ+

CAZ-

KS14

KS20

4S

KC12 /5E/5S

4S

To thechainsafety

Factory

KS5 /

Shunt

From the safety

P309K37 terminal

battery charger board Input

Factorywiring

Output

Freeterminal

Proximity switchfor B door-zone

Visualisation of the presence

only in case of battery supplyof the car in a unlocking zone

From the MainboardKS21 terminal

Proximity switchfor A door-zone

to the 10terminal

electromechanical

Page 64: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER V

INSTALLATION&

CONNECTINGON LANDING

Page 65: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 2

CONNECTING ON LANDING: 2 TO 8 LEVELS (SAPB OR COLLECTIVE 1 BUTTON)

P0

P1

P2

P3

P5

P6

P7

P4

INDICATORSDIGITAL

0V ONLANDING

0V

SW9 TO SW12 JUMPER POSITION ON BG15WARNING!

THE LANDING CALL BUTTONS ARE CONNECTEDSAPB or COLLECTIVE 1 BUTTON

8 FLOORS MAX.(Without Positionning outputs, Duplex,

Level damaged by Fire and double selective service)

24V / 1.2W

24V / 1.2W

NOTHING WILLBE CONNECTED

ON THESE TERMINAL!

PROGRAMMATION:

MAIN BOARD BG15

ELECTRONIC OUTPUTS

UP OR DOWNARROWS

24V / 1.2W

FAULTLIGHT

24V / 1.2WIN USE

INDICATOR

24V / 1.2W FIRESERVICE

LIGHT

OUT OFSERVICE

LIGHTDESCENTE

* FIRESERVICE

KEY

ELECTRONICOUTPUTS

MUST BE INTERFACED

* OUT OFSERVICE KEY

E/SX M1 M2 M3

KP27

NF1 NF2 NF3 COMB 24R

KP34 KP29

NF0 POS0 POS1 POS2 POS3

KP23

CREP0V

24R

KP24 K24

0VFM FD

DEF24R CL

0V0V

POM ED

KP22 KP26 K26 KC28

24RSPG3 SPG1 MHS

SW12 :SW11 :SW10 :

SW9 :

VPMP - VHS - GONG

VPMP VHS

MHSPOM/

Page 66: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 3

CONNECTING ON LANDING: SAPB MORE THAN 8 LEVELS ORCOLLECTIVE 1 OR 2 BUTTONS / LANDING 2 TO 16 LEVELS

M0

D1

D2

D3

M1

M2

M3

THE LANDING CALL BUTTONS ARE CONNECTEDDOWN OR UP COLLECTIVE. FOR MORE THAN

4 FLOORS ADD THE NECESSARY BG18 BOARD

24V / 1.2WINDICATORS

DIGITALUP OR DOWN

ARROWS

24V / 1.2W

FAULTLIGHT

24V / 1.2WIN USE

INDICATOR

24V / 1.2W FIRESERVICE

LIGHT

OUT OFSERVICE

LIGHTDAMAGED

LEVELS DESCENTE

PROGRAMMATION: - IN COLLECTIVE 2 BUTTONS: Add 07-Seg 7-UNLIT ; Add 5C-Seg 5-UNLIT, Bat 6-UNLIT

(SEE THE MASK AT ADDRESSES 13, 14 AND 16, 17)

24V / 1.2W

SW9 TO SW12 JUMPER POSITION ON BG15WARNING!

* OUT OFSERVICE KEY

MAIN BOARD BG15

0V ONLANDING

0V

0V ONLANDING

0V

ELECTRONICOUTPUTS ELECTRONIC

OUTPUTSMUST BE INTERFACED

ELECTRONIC OUTPUTS

* FIRESERVICE

KEY

0VPOM ED

KP26

M0 D1 D2 D3

KP21

M1 M2 M3

KP27

POS0 POS1 POS2 POS3

KP23

CREP0V

24R

KP24 K24

0VFM FD

DEF24R CL

0V

KP22 K26

24RSPG3 SPG1

KC28

MHS

KP34

NF2 NF3 NF4NF1COMB

24R

KP29

SW12 :SW11 :SW10 :

SW9 :

VPMP - VHS - GONG

VPMP VHS

MHS

24V / 1.2W

POM/

Page 67: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 4

COMBINATION OF ELECTRONICS BOARDSIn function of: number of level, number of button at the each landing and the controllertype.

The table below indicates the different combination between the electronics boardsBG15 (Main board), BG18 (Levels boards) and BG19 (2nd service board) includes in yourcontroller, in function of the number of levels (2 to 16 Levels), buttons at each landing (1 or2 buttons) and your controller type (collective 1 button, Full collective, double selectiveservice).

The table below indicates which interception direction at a given landing, in functionof the different parameter state.

When the segment Base 8N is switching on, the equipment MB32 works on SAPB modeor Collective 1 button per landing.

When the segment BLOCAG is switching on, the equipment MB32 works on SAPB mode,if the segment is switching off, the equipment works on Down collective mode.

For reasons describes above at the parameter-segment Base 8N, the software forced theswitching off of the segment Ramdes if you have switching on, one of the segment below:

• DServS - address 02, segment 2. (Double Selective SERVice?)• NivSin - address 02, segment 3, (Level damaged?)• DPLX - address 02, segment 6. (DuPLeX?)

BG15 BG18(1)

BG18(2)

BG18(3)

BG19 Drawingpage

Single automatic operation 2 to 8 level X - - - - 5Single automatic operation 9 to 12 level X X X - - 7Single automatic operation 13 to 16 level X X X X - 7Collective operation 1 button 2 to 8 level X - - - - 9Collective operation 1 button 2 to 16 level X X X X - 11Full collective operation 2 to 4 level X - - - - 13Full collective operation 5 to 8 level X X - - - 13Full collective operation 9 to 12 level X X X - 13Full collective operation 13 to 16 level X X X X - 13Double selective service 2 to 4 level X X - - X 15Double selective service 5 to 8 level X X X X X 15

In any case, the segment Base 8N light on !Segment Segment Segment Segment Interception directionBLOCAG Ramdes MsqDE MsqMo on landing

Lit indifferent indifferent indifferent Single automaticUnlit Unlit indifferent indifferent in Down for all levelsUnlit Lit Unlit Unlit No interceptionUnlit Lit Lit Unlit in DownUnlit Lit Unlit Lit in UpUnlit Lit Lit Lit In both direction (*)

(*) When the both segments Base 8N and Ramdes are lit, the sofware of thecontroller MB32 forced the switching on of the Parameter-segment EFFNSEL (Callcancel option / EFFacement Non Sélectif ?) -address 08, segment 3.

Page 68: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 5

LANDING CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC OPERATION2 TO 8 LEVELS (1/2)

! : Without positioning 1 wire per level-without multiplex-without level damaged

BASE 8NBASE 8 level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BLOCAGSingle automatic

operation?Add. 07Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

RAMDESDown collective

Add. 5CSeg. 6

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons.

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 16Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4P5P6

P7

P0P1P2

P3

Page 69: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 6

LANDING CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC OPERATION2 TO 8 LEVELS (2/2)

etc. and so the option «levels damaged».

any selective light :

next departure arrows, selective gong,position indicator with light,

WARNING!This operating mode forbids

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

P2P1P0

P6P5

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 7

P3

P7

P4

*

*

*

*KP29

KP27

KP34

24R* per output Px

Light 24 V1,2 W max

COMB

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING* THE LANDINGS CALLS

ACCEPTANCE ARE OPTIONALIN CASE OF S.A.P.B.

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

Landing calls connection

Px - APPALD« Down » landing

calls M0,D1 to D15

Add. 06Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5

P6P7

P0P1P2

P3Landing calls preview

Page 70: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 7

LANDING CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC OPERATION2 TO 16 LEVELS (1/2)

! : With positioning 1 wire per level - multiplex - level damaged

BASE 8NBASE 8 level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BLOCAGSingle automatic

operation?Add. 07Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

RAMDESDown collective

Add. 5CSeg. 6

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons.

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 16Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4P5P6

P7

P0P1P2

P3

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 17Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP12

P13P14P15

P8P9P10

P11

Page 71: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 8

LANDING CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC OPERATION2 TO 16 LEVELS (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

per output Px

Light 24 V1,2 W max

24R

D2D1M0

COMB

LEVEL 0

D3

LEVEL 9

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 15

DOWNLANDING CALLS

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

D7D5D6D4

KPMX

KPDX

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

D11D9D10D8

KPMX

KPDX

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

D15D13D14D12

KPMX

KPDX

KP29

KP21

KP27

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

BG18

FU2 COMB

FU5 24RB

Landing calls connection

Px - APPALD« Down » landing

calls M0, D1 toD15

Add. 06Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5P6P7

P0P1P2P3

Px - APPALD« Down » landing

calls M0, D1 toD15

Add. 07Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P12P13P14P15

P8P9P10P11

Landing calls preview

Page 72: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 9

LANDING CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION,1 BUTTON, 2 TO 8 LEVELS (1/2)

! : Without positioning 1 wire per level, without Duplex, without level damaged

BASE 8NBASE 8 Level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BLOCAGSingle automatic

operation?Add. 07Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

RAMDESDown collective

Add. 5CSeg. 6

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons and direction.

MsqMoMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 13Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4P5P6

P7

P0P1P2

P3

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 16Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4P5P6

P7

P0P1P2

P3

Page 73: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 10

LANDING CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION,1 BUTTON, 2 TO 8 LEVELS (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

per output Px

Light 24 V1,2 W max

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

P2P1P0

P6P5

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 7

P3

P7

P4KP29

KP27

KP34

24R*COMB

etc. and so the option «levels damaged».

any selective light :

next departure arrows, selective gong,position indicator with light,

WARNING!This operating mode forbids

Landing calls connection

Px - APPALD« Down » landingcalls M0, D1à D15

Add. 06Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5

P6P7

P0P1P2

P3Landing calls preview

Page 74: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 11

LANDING CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION,1 BUTTON, 2 TO 16 LEVELS (1/2)

BASE 8NBASE 8 Level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BLOCAGSingle automatic

operation?Add. 07Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

RAMDESDown collective

Add. 5CSeg. 6

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons and direction.

MsqMoMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 13Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4

P5P6

P7

P0P1

P2P3

MsqMoMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 14Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP12

P13P14

P15

P8P9P10P11

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 16Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4

P5P6

P7

P0P1

P2P3

MsqDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 17Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP12

P13P14

P15

P8P9P10P11

Page 75: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 12

LANDING CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION,1 BUTTON, 2 TO 16 LEVELS (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

per output Dx or Ux

Light 24 V1,2 W max

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 9

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 15

DOWNLANDING CALLS

UPLANDING CALLS

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

24R

D2

M0

M1

COMB

D3

D7D5D6D4

KPMX

KPDX

D11D9D10D8

KPMX

KPDX

D15D13D14D12

KPMX

KPDX

KP29

KP21

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

BG18

KP27

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

Landing calls connection

Px - APPALD« Down »

landing callsM0,

D1 to D15Add. 06 & 07Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5P6P7

P0P1P2P3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P12P13P14P15

P8P9P10P11

Add 06 :

Add 07 :

Px - APPALM« Up » landingcalls M0 to M15

Add. 03 & 04Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5P6P7

P0P1P2P3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P12P13P14P15

P8P9P10P11

Add 03 :

Add 04 :

Landing calls preview

Page 76: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 13

LANDING CALLS FOR FULL COLLECTIVE OPERATION,2 TO 16 LEVELS (1/2)

BASE 8NBASE 8 Level?

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BLOCAGSingle automatic

operation?Add. 07Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

RAMDESDown collective

Add. 5CSeg. 6

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons and direction.

MSQMOMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 13Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4

P5P6

P7

P0P1

P2P3

MSQMOMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 14Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP12

P13P14

P15

P8P9P10P11

MSQDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 16Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP4

P5P6

P7

P0P1

P2P3

MSQDEMask the landingcalls for « Down »

Add. 17Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAMP12

P13P14

P15

P8P9P10P11

Page 77: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 14

LANDING CALLS FOR FULL COLLECTIVE OPERATION,2 TO 16 LEVELS (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING 24R

D2D1M0

M2M1

COMB

LEVEL 0

D3

M3

LEVEL 9

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 15

DOWNLANDING CALLS

UPLANDING CALLS

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

M7M5M6M4

D7D5D6D4

KPMX

KPDX

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

M11M9M10M8

D11D9D10D8

KPMX

KPDX

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

M13M14M12

D15D13D14D12

KPMX

KPDX

KP29

KP21

KP27

per output Dx or Ux

Light 24 V1,2 W max

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

BG18

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

Landing calls connection

Px - APPALD« Down »

landing callsAdd. 06 & 07Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5P6P7

P0P1P2P3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P12P13P14P15

P8P9P10P11

Add 06 :

Add 07 :

Px - APPALM« Up » landing

callsAdd. 03 & 04Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P4P5P6P7

P0P1P2P3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

P12P13P14P15

P8P9P10P11

Add 03 :

Add 04 :

Landing calls preview

Page 78: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 15

DOUBLE SELECTIVE SERVICE LANDING CALLS (1/3)Principe:

The notion of double selective service is to made a selective opening of the front orrear door.

This require 2 car buttons box (one for each side !).In the same way, for the landing calls, it must be possible to connect together the

front and rear door for a same floorWhen the 32 serie is meant to drive 2 selective service, it is necessary to 'split' the

car and landings calls.The 32 serie can delivered 16 levels maxi. (BG15 + 3 BG18 floor boards) on Single

or Double non selective service, this capacity is reduce at 8 Levels in case of doubleselective service.

Note:

• To create a controller with 2 to 4 Levels on Double Selective Service,You needs the main board BG15 + 1 BG18 levels boards;

• To create a controller with 5 to 8 Levels on Double Selective Service,You needs the main board BG15 + 3 BG18 levels boards.

EXAMPLE: CONNECTION FOR A CONFIGURATION OF 4 LEVELCONCERNING THE CAR CALLS:

The inputs C0 to C3 (BG15, KC21) correspond at the calls for the level 0 to 3 of the front door.The inputs C4 to C7 (BG18 (1), KCx) correspond at the calls for the level 0 to 3 of the rear door.

CONCERNING THE LANDING CALLS FOR DOWN:The inputs M0, D1 to D3 (BG15, KP21) correspond at the calls for the level 0 to 3 of the front door.The inputs D4 to D7 (BG18 (1), KPDx) correspond at the calls for the level 0 to 3 of the rear door.

CONCERNING THE LANDING CALLS FOR UP:The inputs M1 to M3 (BG15, KP27) correspond at the calls for the level 1 to 3 of the front door.The inputs M5 to M7 (BG18 (1), KPMx) correspond at the calls for the level 1 to 3 of the rear door.

If there is no door at some level, of course, there is nothing connecting on thecorresponding input!!!

CAR DOWN LANDING UP LANDINGLEVEL BG15 BG18

(1)BG18

(2)BG18

(3)BG15 BG18

(1)BG18

(2)BG18

(3)BG15 BG18

(1)BG18

(2)BG18

(3)7 C7 D7 X

F 6 C6 D6 M6A 5 C5 D5 M5C 4 C4 D4 M4E 3 C3 D3 M3

2 C2 D2 M21 1 C1 D1 M1

0 C0 M0 X7 C7 D7 X

F 6 C6 D6 M6A 5 C5 D5 M5C 4 C4 D4 M4E 3 C7 D7 M7

2 C6 D6 M62 1 C5 D5 M5

0 C4 D4 X

Page 79: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 16

DOUBLE SELECTIVE SERVICE LANDING CALLS (2/3)FRONT DOOR N°1 REAR DOOR N°2

For the mask, to switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons and Direction

MSQMOMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 13Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFM0M1M2M3

FRONT DOOR - BG15 MSQMOMask the landingcalls for « Up »

Add. 13Seg. 4 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIFM0M1M2M3

REAR DOOR - 1 st BG18

RAM

PAR

&

Add. 14Seg. 0 to 2

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFM4M5M6

FRONT DOOR - 2 nd BG18&

Add. 14Seg. 4 to 6

ADR/DON

MODIFM4M5M6

REAR DOOR - 3 rd BG18

RAM

PAR

MSQDEMask the landingcalls for « Down

»Add. 16

Seg. 1 to 3

ADR/DON

MODIFD1D2D3

FRONT DOOR - BG15

RAM

PAR

MSQDEMask the landingcalls for « Down

»Add. 16

Seg. 5 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFD1D2D3

REAR DOOR - 1 st BG18

&

Add. 17Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFD4D5D6D7

FRONT DOOR - 2 nd BG18&

Add. 17Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFD4D5D6D7

REAR DOOR - 3 rd BG18

Px - APPALM« Up » landing

callsAdd. 03

Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP0P1P2P3

FRONT DOOR - BG15 Px - APPALM« Up » landing

callsAdd. 03

Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP0P1P2P3

REAR DOOR - 1 st BG18

&

Add. 04Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP4P5P6P7

FRONT DOOR - 2 nd BG18

&

Add. 04Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP4P5P6P7

REAR DOOR - 3 rd BG18

Px - APPALD« Down » landing

callsAdd. 06

Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP0P1P2P3

FRONT DOOR - BG15 Px - APPALD« Down » landing

callsAdd. 06

Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP0P1P2P3

REAR DOOR - 1 st BG18

&

Add. 07Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP4P5P6P7

FRONT DOOR - 2 nd BG18

&

Add. 07Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFP4P5P6P7

REAR DOOR - 3 rd BG18

Landing calls preview

Page 80: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 17

DOUBLE SELECTIVE SERVICE LANDING CALLS (3/3)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

SW9SW10SW11SW12

D2D1M0

M2M1

D3

M3

1st BG18 boardLevel 0 to 3

M7M5M6

D7D5D6D4

KPMX

KPDX

KP21

KP27

BG15

M5M6M4

D7D5D6D4

3rd BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

KPMX

KPDX

M5M6M4

D7D5D6D4

2nd BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

KPMX

KPDX

BG19

24RCOMB

F.D 1 R.D 2

BG18

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 6

LEVEL 5

LEVEL 4

LEVEL 3

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 0

per output Dx or Ux

Light 24 V1,2 W max

KP29

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

DSERVSDouble Selective

SERVice?Add. 02Seg. 2

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Double selective service landing callsconnection

Page 81: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 18

ID 30 MODEL, LANDING POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

ID 30

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

CREP

24R0V

CREP

24R0V

CREP0V

24R

BG15

CREP

KP24

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

ID 30 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 82: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 19

ID 50-1 MODEL, LANDING POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

ID 50-1

CREP0V

24R

BG15

CREP

KP24

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

ID 50-1 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 83: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 20

ID 50 MODEL, LANDING POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

ID 50

CREP

24R0V

BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24R

KP24

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E1)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

ID 50 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 84: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 21

IDFL 30 / 50 MODEL, LANDING POSITION INDICATORWITH ARROWS

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24R

KP24K25

FMFD FD FM 24R

IDFL 30 / 50

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E5)

FMFD

(E3)

(E1)

CREP

24R(ALIM)

0V(COM)

(E5)

FD

FM(E3)

(E1)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

IDFL 30 / 50 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 85: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 22

STANDARD PROGRAMMING

EXAMPLE: Configuration for an installation of 8 LEVELS including 2 BASEMENT.If at Level 2 - Ground Level (Address 2A), we desire « RC » displayed, we program 1C to

parameter address 2A (REPTxx : REPeaTer at level xx).

Level Address15 3714 3613 3512 3411 3310 329 318 307 2F6 2E5 2d4 2C3 2b2 2A1 290 28

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

0 00 13 0d ES 1A1 01 14 0E RJ 1b2 02 15 0F RC 1C3 03 16 10 RH 1d4 04 17 11 RB 1E5 05 18 12 SS 1F6 06 19 13 P0 207 07 -0 14 P1 218 08 -1 15 P2 229 09 -2 16 P3 2310 0A -3 17 RS 2411 0b -4 18 ME 2512 0C -5 19

Select address 2A corresponding to the 2nd level withPush buttons.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF1

1 second later, a value is displayed, if this value suits you(our example 1C) Don’t change it, if not, slide theADR/DON - MODIF switch to MODIF

ADR/DON

MODIF

2

Modify the value to obtain 1C with push buttons toincrease/decrease to the new value.Register the new value by pushing and releasing bothbuttons at the same time.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF3

Slide the ADR/DON - MODIF switch to ADR/DON

The new value is memorised.

ADR/DON

MODIF 4

Page 86: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 23

IDFL 30 / 50 MD MODEL, LANDING POSITION INDICATOR WITHSCROLLING MESSAGES ARROWS

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15

CREP

CREP 24R

24R

IDFL 30 / 50 MD

CREP0V

24R

KP24 WARNING!

indicator with scrollingThe command of the

needs the 'V15'messages arrows

programm or posterior

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(ALIM)

0V(COM)

(E3)

Program

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

IDFL 30 / 50 MD model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 87: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 24

POSITION INDICATOR WITH SCROLLING MESSAGES ARROWSPROGRAMMING

Repère du graphisme MDCREP1 MDCREP3 MDCREP4 MDCREP7

40 Ø Ø Ø Ø41 1 1 1 142 2 2 2 243 3 3 3 344 4 4 4 445 5 5 5 546 6 6 6 647 7 7 7 748 8 8 8 849 9 9 9 94A 1 Ø 1 Ø 1Ø 1 Ø4B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14C 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 24D 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 34E 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 44F 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 550 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 651 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 752 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 853 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 954 - Ø - Ø - Ø - Ø55 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 156 - 2 - 2 - 2 - 257 - 3 - 3 F - 358 - 4 - 4 U B - 459 - 5 - 5 B - 55A E S F E E S5B R J H G R J5C R C U L G R C5D R H B M R H5E R B E L B R B5F S S G A S S60 P 0 K C P 061 P 1 L G D P 162 P 2 M B 1 P 263 P 3 O G B 2 P 364 R S P O S R S65 M E U G 2 Ø M E66 P 4 W 2 1 P 467 P 5 E G 2 2 P 568 P 6 D G 2 3 P 669 P 7 S G - 3 P 76A P 8 U 1 U G P 86B P 9 U 2 P P 96C 2 Ø O 1 H 2 Ø6D 2 1 O 2 K 2 16E 2 2 O 3 L 2 26F 2 3 O 4 B 3 2 3707172 HORS SERVICE AUSSER BETRIEB OUT OF SERVICE SIN SERVICIO

73 SERVICE INCENDIE BRANDFALLSTEUERUNG FIRE CONTROL BOMBEROS

74 CABINE RESERVEE SONDERFAHRT SPECIAL SERVICE PRIORIDAD CABINAMDCREP3-P MDCREP3-C

75 LIBRE ÜBERLAST IN SERVICE ELECTRA VITORIA

G B S PF D

Page 88: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 25

FL 30 / 50 MODEL, LANDING DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FM

24R0V

FD

FM 0V 24R

FL 30 / 50

FM

24R0V

FD

BG15

KP29K25

FD

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(E1)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(E1)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

FL 30 / 50 model, direction arrows connection

FM & FDUp arrow &Down arrow

Add. 15Seg. 4 and 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

FMFD

FL 30 / 50 model, direction arrows state preview

Page 89: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 26

MODEL WITH LIGHT LESS THAN TO 1,2 W (TOTAL 2,4 WMAX), LANDING DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Light 24 V2,4 W max.

Connect 1 P217 boxPER SENS

WARNING !!!

PER SENSDont forget thepossible arrows

in car

In case of overload of theadmissible nominal

power (2,4 W)

BG15

0V

FM

K25

FD

Direction arrows connection

FM & FDUp arrow &Down arrow

Add. 15Seg. 4 to 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

FMFD

Direction arrows state preview

Page 90: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 27

MODEL WITH LIGHT SUPERIOR TO 1,2 W (TOTAL 2,4 W MAX),LANDING DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 15

123

1112 14

22 21 24

123

1112 14

22 21 24

FM24R

0VFD

LEVEL 7K25 K26

P217

ARE INTERCONNECTEDTHE TERMINAL BLOCK 2 & 1

ON THE P217 BOARD

Light 24 V2,4 W max.

See the drawing

WARNING !!!

PER SENSDont forget thepossible arrows

in car

In case of overload of theadmissible nominal

power (2,4 W)

below

Direction arrows connection

Page 91: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 28

IDFL 30/50 MD MODEL, NEXT DEPARTURE ARROWS WITH SCROLLING MESSAGES (1/3)

IDFL 30 / 50 MD

CREP0V

24R

CREP

24R0V

24RPOSx

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

POS13POS12

KPOSXPOS15POS14

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

POS9POS8

KPOSXPOS11POS10

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

POS5POS4

KPOSX

POS7POS6

POS2POS1POS0

POS3

KP23

KP24

CREP

24R0V

24RPOSx

CREP

24R0V

24RPOSx

CREP

BG15

BG18

BG15

CREP 24R

24R

0V

POSx 24R

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3) (E1)

(E2)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3) (E1)

(E2)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3) (E1)

(E2)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)(E1)(E2)

POSx24R FIXEDIN FRONT

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FLPDP & FLCLIGNext departure arrows& Direction indicator

flashingAdd. 08

Seg. 4 and 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FLPDPFCLIG

Next departure arrows with scrolling messages connection

Page 92: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 29

NEXT DEPARTURE ARROWS WITH LIGHT (2/3)

FLPDP & FLCLIGNext departure

arrows &Direction

indicator flashingAdd. 08

Seg. 4 and 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FLPDPFCLIG

WARNING !100 mA per position outputs POS x.

May attention of all elements connectedon these outputs, (Selective gong,arrows for next departure, etc ...).

THE OUTPUTS FM AND FD

POS2POS1POS0

LEVEL 0

POS3

LEVEL 9

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 15

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

POS13POS12

KPOSXPOS15POS14

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

POS9POS8

KPOSXPOS11POS10

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

POS5POS4

KPOSXPOS7POS6

FMFD

DEPARTUREIN DOWN

NEXTDEPARTURE

IN UP

NEXT

PRODUCE 24R.

BG15

K25

DIODE 1N400x

KP23

Next departure arrows connection

Page 93: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 30

NEXT DEPARTURE ARROWS (3/3)

FM & FDUp arrow &Down arrow

Add. 15Seg. 4 to 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

FMFD

Direction arrows preview

POS0-7POSition outputs

POS0 to POS7Add. 1F

Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

POS4POS5

POS6POS7

POS0POS1POS2

POS3Level 0 to 7, position outputs preview

POS8-15POSition outputsPOS8 to POS15

Add. 20Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

POS12POS13

POS14POS15

POS8POS9POS10

POS11Level 8 to 15, position outputs preview

Page 94: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 31

LANDING SELECTIVE GONG (1/2)

GONGARGONG onstopping?

Add. 09Seg. 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

KP23 POS2POS1POS0

LEVEL 0

POS3

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 7

LEVEL 9

LEVEL 15

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

POS13POS12

KPOSXPOS15POS14

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

POS9POS8

KPOSXPOS11POS10

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

POS5POS4

KPOSXPOS7POS6

K26K23

24RSPG4

SPG3SPG1

123

1112 14

22 21 24

DIODE 1N400x

WARNING !100 mA per position outputs POS x.

May attention of all elements connectedon these outputs, (Selective gong,arrows for next departure, etc ...).

ARE INTERCONNECTEDTHE TERMINAL BLOCK 2 & 1

ON THE P217 BOARD

P217

OUTPUTS (SPGX)PROGRAMMABLE

PRODUCE 0V

WARNING !!!

SPG2

BG18

BG15

BG15

Landing « Selective gong »

Page 95: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 32

LANDING SELECTIVE GONG (2/2)

GONGxGONG on

Programmableoutputs xx

Add. 79Seg. 0 to 3

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

SPG1on

SPG3on

SPG2on

SPG4on

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

Page 96: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 33

LANDING OUT OF SERVICE LIGHT (1/2)

VHSOut of service light

on SPGxAdd. 79

Seg. 4 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

SPG1on

SPG3on

SPG2on

SPG4on

OUT OFSERVICE

SPG2

24RSPG4

SPG3

K23 K26

SPG1

BG15MHS

from 0V

OUT OFSERVICE LIGHT

24V

KC28

SPGx PRODUCETHE OUTPUTS

WARNING!!!

123

1112 14

22 21 24

Above 60 mAper light

FAULT LIGHT24V

P217

ON LANDING

24RSPG

CONTACT

0V

« Out of service » contact and light connection

VHSOut of service light

Add. 15Seg. 1

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Out of service light state preview

Page 97: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 34

LANDING OUT OF SERVICE LIGHT (2/2)

NIVMHSOut of service level

Add. 43

1248

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Out of service level choice (in hexadecimal mode)

MHSOut of service

Add. 0ESeg. 1

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Out of service contact state preview

MHSPFOut of service door

closed?Add. 09Seg. 2

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Out of service door closed choice

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

Page 98: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter V - page 35

LANDING « ENGAGED » LIGHT

CL

LIGHT24V / 1,2W

0V

LED IN SERIALWITH A 1,5KRESISTOR

OR

BG15

CL

ENGAGED LIGHT24V / TOTAL 2A MAX

PILOTEDBY

RELAY

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 1

LEVEL N

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 1

LEVEL N

KP22

Landing « engaged » light connection

CLEngaged light

(Flashing)Add. 28Seg. 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

« Engaged » light state preview

Page 99: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER VI

INSTALLATION&

CONNECTINGIN CAR

Page 100: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 2

CONNECTING IN CAR: 2 TO 8 LEVELS (SAPB OR COLLECTIVE 1 BUTTON)

THE CAR CALLS ARE CONNECTED ON UP OR DOWN COLLECTIVE 1 BUTTON OR ON SAPB 8 FLOORS MAX.(Without Positionning outputs, Duplex, Level damaged by Fire and double selective service)

INSPECTIONUP END LIMIT

SAFETY LANECONNECTIONS

STOP IN INSPECTION BOX

24V / 1.2W

Tape headO03

INSPECTIONBOX

AUTOMATIC DOOR

* Recommendations :

nor when the tape head bistable passes the magnet.

CS1: PHOTOCELL CONTACTCOI1: SAFETY KNUCKLE CONTACT

OR DOOR RE-OPEN BUTTON

FCFE1: CLOSE END LIMITFCOU1: OPEN END LIMIT

FF1: DOOR CLOSE BUTTON

INDICATORDIGITAL

UP OR DOWNAROWS

24V / 1.2W 24V / 1.2W

EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING OF 4 PROGAMMABLE

OUTPUTSMHS: OUT OF SERVICE CONTACT

PRIC: CAR PRIORITY KEYNS: NON STOP CONTACTSU: OVERLOAD CONTACT

VHS: OUT OF SERVICE LIGHT

VSU: OVERLOAD LIGHTVPMP: FIRE SERVICE LIGHT

GONG: GONG OUTPUT

NOTHING WILLBE CONNECTED

ON THESE TERMINAL!

SW9 TO SW12 JUMPER POSITION ON BG15WARNING!

KC22

CABCAA 0V +24

MAIN BOARD BG15

0V INCAR

ELECTRONIC OUTPUTS

ELECTRONICOUTPUTS

KC21 KP21

C0 C1 C2 C3 M0 D1 D2 D3

KC29

COMB24R

KP23

POS0 POS2POS1 POS3

KC24

0VCREP 24R

K24

0VFM FD

KC28

NSPRIC SU

MHS

K26

SPG424R SPG3

SPG1

K23

SPG2

KA13

FCFE1 0V CS1FCOU1 FF1 COI1

KC23

INS GDGM 0V

Page 101: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 3

CONNECTING IN CAR: SAPB MORE THAN 8 LEVELS ORCOLLECTIVE 1 OR 2 BUTTONS / LANDING 2 TO 16 LEVELS

SELECTIVE GONG

SEE WIRINGDIAGRAMS FORHALL LANTERNS

...

SW9 TO SW12 JUMPER POSITION ON BG15WARNING!

THE CAR CALLS ARE CONNECTING ON UP AND DOWN COLLECTIVES 2 BUTTONS

C4

C5

C6

C7

BG18 BOARD

INSPECTIONUP END LIMIT

INDICATORDIGITAL

UP OR DOWNAROWS

24V / 1.2W 24V / 1.2W

EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING OF 4 PROGAMMABLE

OUTPUTS

24V / 1.2W

Tape headO03

C4 C6 C7

KCX

C5

INSPECTIONBOX

SAFETY LANECONNECTIONS

AUTOMATIC DOORSTOP IN INSPECTION BOX

* Recommendations :

nor when the tape head bistable passes the magnet.

MAIN BOARD BG15

0V INCAR

FOR MORE THAN 4 FLOORS ADDONE OR MORE BG18 FLOOR

EXTENSION BOARD

ELECTRONIC OUTPUTS

ELECTRONICOUTPUTS

CS1: PHOTOCELL CONTACTCOI1: SAFETY KNUCKLE CONTACT

OR DOOR RE-OPEN BUTTON

FCFE1: CLOSE END LIMITFCOU1: OPEN END LIMIT

FF1: DOOR CLOSE BUTTON

MHS: OUT OF SERVICE CONTACT

PRIC: CAR PRIORITY KEYNS: NON STOP CONTACTSU: OVERLOAD CONTACT

VHS: OUT OF SERVICE LIGHT

VSU: OVERLOAD LIGHTVPMP: FIRE SERVICE LIGHT

GONG: GONG OUTPUT

KC29

COMB24R

KP23

POS0 POS2POS1 POS3

KC24

0VCREP 24R

K24

0VFM FD

KC28

NSPRIC SU

MHS

K26

SPG424R SPG3

SPG1

K23

SPG2

KC23

INS GDGM 0V

KC22

CABCAA 0V +24

KA13

FCFE1 0V CS1FCOU1 FF1 COI1

KC21

C0 C1 C2 C3

Page 102: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 4

CAR CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC AND COLLECTIVEOPERATION, 1 BUTTON, 2 TO 8 LEVELS (1/2)

! : Without positioning 1 wire per level, without Duplex, without level damaged

BASE 8NBASE 8 Level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons.

MSQCABMask the

« Car » callsAdd. 10

Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM C4C5C6

C7

C0C1C2

C3

Page 103: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 5

CAR CALLS FOR SINGLE AUTOMATIC AND COLLECTIVEOPERATION, 1 BUTTON, 2 TO 8 LEVELS (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

C2C1C0

C6C5

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 7

C3

C7

C4

*

*

*

*KC29

KC21

KP21

24R*per output Cx

Light 24 V1,2 W max

COMB

etc. and so the option «levels damaged».

any selective light :

next departure arrows, selective gong,position indicator with light,

WARNING!This operating mode forbids

* THE CAR CALLSACCEPTANCE ARE OPTIONALIN CASE OF S.A.P.B.

« Car » calls connection

Cx - ENVCAB« Car » calls

Add. 00Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

C4C5C6C7

C0C1C2C3

« Car » calls visualisation

Page 104: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 6

CAR CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION1 OR 2 BUTTONS, 2 TO 16 LEVELS (1/2)

BASE 8NBASE 8 Level

Add. 5CSeg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons.

MSQCABMask the

« Car » callsAdd. 10

Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM C4C5C6

C7

C0C1

C2C3

MSQCABMask the

« Car » callsAdd. 11

Seg. 0 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM C12C13C14

C15

C8C9C10

C11

Page 105: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 7

CAR CALLS FOR COLLECTIVE OPERATION1 OR 2 BUTTONS, 2 TO 16 LEVEL (2/2)

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

COMB

KC29

BG15

per output Cx

Light 24 V1,2 W max

SW9SW10SW11SW12

3rd BG18 boardLevel 12 to 15

C5C4

KCXC7C6

2nd BG18 boardLevel 8 to 11

C5C4

KCXC7C6

1st BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

C5C4

KCXC7C6

C2C1C0

C3KC21 LEVEL 1

LEVEL 3

LEVEL 0

LEVEL 4

24R

LEVEL 15

LEVEL 12

LEVEL 11

LEVEL 8

LEVEL 7

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

« Car » calls connection

Cx - ENVCAB« Car » calls

C0 to C7Add. 00

Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

C4C5C6C7

C0C1C2C3

Cx - ENVCAB« Car » calls

C8 to C15Add. 01

Seg. 0 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

C12C13C14C15

C8C9C10C11

« Car » calls preview

Page 106: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 8

DOUBLE SELECTIVE SERVICE CAR CALLS (1/2)

FRONT DOOR N°1 REAR DOOR N°2

For the mask:To switch on the segment corresponding to the active buttons.

MSQCABMask the« Car »

callsAdd. 10

Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC1C2C3

Front door - BG15

C0

MSQCABMask the« Car »

callsAdd. 10

Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC1C2C3

Rear door - 1 st BG18

C0

&

Add. 11Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC4C5C6C7

Front door - 2 nd BG18

&

Add. 11Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC4C5C6C7

Rear door - 3 rd BG18

Cx - ENVCAB« Car » calls

Add. 00Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC0C1C2C3

Front door - BG15Cx - ENVCAB

« Car » callsAdd. 00

Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

C0C1C2C3Rear door - 1 st BG18

&

Add. 01Seg. 0 to 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFC4C5C6C7

Front door - 2 nd BG18

&

Add. 01Seg. 4 to 7

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

C4C5C6C7Rear door - 3 rd BG18

« Car » calls preview

Page 107: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 9

DOUBLE SELECTIVE SERVICE CAR CALLS (2/2)

C2C1C0

C3

3rd BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

C5C4

KCXC7C6

2nd BG18 boardLevel 4 to 7

C5C4

KCXC7C6

1st BG18 boardLevel 0 to 3

C5C4

KCXC7C6

24RCOMB

KC21

KC29

REAR DOORn°2

FRONT DOORn°1

C4

C7

C4

C7

LEVEL 7LEVEL 7

LEVEL 4LEVEL 4

LEVEL 3LEVEL 3

LEVEL 0LEVEL 0

per output Cx

Light 24 V1,2 W max

SW9SW10SW11SW12

BG15

BG19

BG18

FU5 / FU2

2,5A-250V dim: 5 x 20

24RB / COMBPROTECTIONWIRE FOR CALLPANEL BUTTONS

QUICK ACTING

FU5 24RB

FU2 COMB

DServSDouble Selective

service?Add. 02Seg. 2

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Double selective service « Car » calls connection

Page 108: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 10

CONNECTING OF TAPE HEAD O03-1 & O03-2FOR COUNTING WITH SLOTTED TAPE (1/2)

+240V

CAACAB

+-ab

123

STATE OF BEAM A

JUMPER UP POSITION( 2-3)HB32

B32

CONNECT NOTHING ON

OF THE TAPE-HEAD

WARNING !!!

0V & + 24

!

O03-1TAPE HEAD

+ - a b

+ - a b

BG15

CAB

CAA

Used in caseof extreme up contactO03-2

O03-1

OR

SW1

N70B

PL

CAB

CAA

ED EM

VEC01

KC22

CABCAA

0V+24

K4

0V CABCAA

BG15

STATE OF BEAM B

The tape head must be placedat least at 20 cmof a source magnetic !

WARNING

Connecting of tape head O03-1 or O03-2

MINIBLOCCA & CB

Tape head beam ATape head beam B

Add. FFSeg. 7 & 6

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

CBCA

Beam CA & CB of tape head O03-1 or O03-2 preview

Page 109: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 11

CONNECTING OF TAPE HEAD O03-1 & O03-2For COUNTING WITH SLOTTED TAPE 2/2

CAA, CAB, EXD (& EXM (003-2))Tape head beam ATape head beam B

Extreme Down contact(& Extreme Up contact)

Add. 11Seg. 0, 1, 3 (& 2 (EXM))

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

EXD CABCAAEXM

(O03-2)

Tape head beam state (O03-1 or O03-2) and the magnetic switch preview

DEF

BG15

Inversion of the car movement

DEF

BG15

Consequence of an incorrect reading by CA & CB signal

DEF

BG15

Consequence of the tape head O03 fault

DEF

BG15

Tape head O03 not powered

Page 110: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 12

CAR ALARM BUTTON

Life cycle of batteryis between 5 and 7 years

BOARDCHARGERBATTERY

12V - 0,5 / 1,2 Ah

KC26

0VECS

BAL

ALARMBUTTON

EMERGENCYLIGHTING

KM13

12PBAL

ALARM

K17

LN

220V SUPPLYBATTERY CHARGER

P309

Car alarm button connection

Page 111: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 13

CAR STOP BUTTON

Life cycle of batteryis between 5 and 7 years

BOARDCHARGERBATTERY

12V - 0,5 / 1,2 Ah

LN

P309

SECU3SECU2

Battery charger220V supply

KC26

12P 0V

K17KM13

JUNCTION BOX

Car stopbutton

(14.2.2.2)

BUZZER

Car stop button connection

Page 112: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 14

CAR GONG 1/2

GONGGONG on

Programmableoutputs xx

Add. 79Seg. 0 to 3

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM SPG2on

SPG1on

SPG3on

SPG4on

BG15

K26K23

SPG2

24RSPG4

SPG3SPG1

OUTPUTS (SPGX)PROGRAMMABLE

PRODUCE 0V

WARNING!

GONG24V / 1,2W

K1

P262

SW1SW2

SW2

SW2

SW1

SW1

« Non selective gong» (in car)

Page 113: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 15

CAR GONG (2/2)

GONGGONGAdd. 15Seg. 6

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Gong preview

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

Page 114: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 16

UNLOCKING RETIRING RAMP WITH DIRECT CURRENT

TFR8Filteringof « 8 »

Add. 45

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

1/100 s

Hex

BG15

K23

+24CAM

+CAM-CAM

RETIRING RAMP

+RD-RD

+- TENSION SUPPLY

RETIRING RAMPFactoryConnected

Input

Output

BY255 DIODE(1300V/3A)

ONLY IN DIRECTCURRENT

A2

1L1 3L2 5L3

2 T1 4T2 6T3

A1

LP4K09004

01 24VI O

Telemecanique

_

+

8 T4

7 L4

CAM

« Retiring ramp » connection

CAMRetiring ramp

Add. 13Seg. 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Retiring ramp output state preview

Page 115: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 17

FRONT DOOR THREE PHASE MOTOR

CARPO1Front doormechanical

characteristicsAdd. 40

Seg. 0 to 7ECRITBG17

P1SFCFEP1SFCOUVERSTF1

RGPT

MSTPRP1AMPSEC1MSTPMP1

PMAFCP1

CLOSED ACCELERATION

OPEN END-LIMIT CONTACT

CLOSED END-LIMIT CONTACT

REOPENING BY NORMALLYOPEN CONTACTS

(Eg: Door re-open button)

REOPENING BY NORMALLYCLOSED CONTACTS

(Eg: Sensor)

OPTIONAL IN ACCORDANCEWITH DOOR MOTOR TYPE.

OPTIONAL IN ACCORDANCEWITH DOOR MOTOR TYPE.

BRAKE :*

DOOR MOTORRESISTOR

INJECTOR'SADJUSTMENT

BY255 DIODE

KA13FCOU1

0VFF1

COI1

FCOU1

FCFE1

CS1

FF1

COI1

FCFE1CS1

BG15

RAOUM1 Vit3 ~ (1300V/3A)

+

- RAFE

UT1VT1

WT1-RD

IO1IR1

IF1

*

*

**

INJECTOR :**WITH DIRECT CURRENTBRAKING BY INJECTION

P253M

****

E.M.C.

Front door three phase motor connection

PAUTOFCOU1, FCFE1, CS1,

COI1, FF1Automatic front

doorAdd. 0F

Seg. 0 to 4

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FF1

FCOU1CS1

COI1 FCFE1

Page 116: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 18

REAR DOOR THREE PHASE MOTOR

CARPO2Rear door

mechanicalcharacteristics

Add. 60Seg. 0 to 6

ECRITBG17

P2SFCFEP2SFCOUVERSTF2

MSTPRP2AMPSEC2MSTPMP2

PMAFCP2

WITH DIRECT CURRENTBRAKING BY INJECTION OPTIONAL IN ACCORDANCE

WITH DOOR MOTOR TYPE.

KA16

FCOU2

0V

FCFE2CS2

FF2COI2

FCOU2

FCFE2

CS2

FF2

COI2

CLOSED ACCELERATION

E.M.C.

UT2VT2

WT2IO2

IR2IF2-RD

M1 Vit3 ~

RAOU RAFEDOOR MOTOR - RESISTOR

INJECTOR'SADJUSTMENT

BY255 DIODE(1300V/3A)

+

OPTIONAL IN ACCORDANCEWITH DOOR MOTOR TYPE.

BRAKE :

*

*

**

INJECTOR :**

P253M

****

BG19

BG15

OPEN END-LIMIT CONTACT

CLOSED END-LIMIT CONTACT

REOPENING BY NORMALLYOPEN CONTACTS

(Eg: Door re-open button)

REOPENING BY NORMALLYCLOSED CONTACTS

(Eg: Sensor)

Rear door three phase motor connection

PAUTOFCOU2, FCFE2, CS2,

COI2, FF2Automatic rear

doorAdd. 10

Seg. 0 to 4

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FF2

FCOU2CS2

COI2 FCFE2

Page 117: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 19

AUTOMATIC DOOR MOTOR PILOTED BY RETIRING RAMP

BG15

K23

+24CAM

A2

1L1 3L2 5L3

2 T1 4T2 6T3

A1

LP4K09004

01 24VI O

Telemecanique

_

+

8 T4

7 L4

CAM

DOOR ZONE

Factoryconnected

Input

Output

Freeterminal

ORCAR DOOR

MOTOR

ZPCAM

KT3

+ _ _

+RD -RD

+CAM-CAM

BG22

220 V INPUTSUPPLY

The operator's power supply MUST BE CUTby the principal switch in the machine room.

and / or by the car's electrical plug.IT MUST NOT therefore be supplied by the lighting circuit

Forbidento open

between level(EN 81 § 7.7.3)

Explaination(CEN n°227)

Automatic door motor piloted by retiring ramp

CAMRetiring ramp

Add. 13Seg. 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Retiring ramp output preview

Page 118: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 20

ELECTRONIC DOOR CONTROL UNIT OP06 OR OP11Presentation of VVVF door card OP06 or OP11.

The Electronic Door Control Unit OP06 or OP11 has been designed to control 3Phase AC motor or D.C. motor - 0,3 kW (OP06) and 0,6 kW (OP11).

3 Phase AC motor: Programme OP11 / OP06B - V07 14 MHz - 25/10/95DC motor: Programme OP11 / OP06B - V07 CC - 10/02/95The frequency drive regulates the doors' acceleration and deceleration, which can

be individually adjusted to suit the requirements of the application in both opening andclosing directions.Connection Diagram of the Electronic Card.

OP06 or OP11

COMOU

FCOU

FCFEFE

COM OV +12+16 CB CA

J2

J1 J3 J4

PH3 PH1 PH2J5

- + - + - +

DCMOTOR

240 VACSUPPLY

TO S/EDGECIRCUIT

TERMINALS

CONNECTED IN DELTA3 PHASE AC MOTOR 240V NOTE : Position VVVF card as close

to door gear motor as possibleDO NOT CONNECT A P253 UNITTO THIS MOTOR

Open signal from the controller, should be connected to Terminal connector J4 on PH2+ andPH2-.Close signal from the controller, should be connected to Terminal connector J4 on PH1+ and J3on PH1-.Open Slow Down Limit should be connected to Terminal connector J2 on 0V and CA.Close Slow Down Limit should be connected to Terminal connector J2 on 0V and CB.Door Nudging will be given from the controller and should be connected to Terminal connector J3on PH3+ and PH3-. It is also required to give a door close signal.

Door re-opening is created due to an over-current which will energise the on-board relay. The relaycontact should be connected to the safety edge circuit to open the doors. The terminals to connectto are marked COM FC and FCFE (normally open) of the J1 connector.

NOTE: The V.V.V.F. / Motor link should be as short as possible.

IMPERATIVESeparate the conductors carrying large current and those carrying

electric information at low current.For more information refer you at the documentation [ref AUTINOR: 7276)

Page 119: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 21

ELECTRONIC DOOR CONTROL UNIT OP15 1/2Presentation of the VVVF door card OP15.

The Electronic Door Control Unit OP15 has been designed to control 3 Phase ACmotor up to 0,3 kW.

3 Phase Motor:

• Programme Slow down contacts: ............ OP15 R xx – xx/xx/xx• Programme Incremental Encoder: ........... OP15 I xx – xx/xx/xx

The VVVF door drive only independently runs the slow down contact, due to thecontact which are connected directly or to the incremental encoder.

The opening and closing command are given from the controller which receivedirectly the end limit contacts or by the intermediately of the encoder which knows theexact position of the leaves.

Connection diagram of Electronic Box.

The Open signal should be connected to Terminal connector K4 on – [2] and + [1]. (24V ~or =)The Close signal should be connected to Terminal connector K4 on – [4] and + [3].(24V ~ or =)The re-opening signal should be connected to Terminal connector K4 on – [6] and + [5].(24V ~ or =)The Fire Service signal to do the Set-up speed on closing should be connected toTerminal K4 on – [8] and + [7]. (24V ~ or =).

DO NOT CONNECTWARNING !!!

ON THE MOTORA SUPPRESSOR

DOORSUPPLY230 VAC

-+

-+

-+

-+

0V

16V

CA

CB

0VCACB

0V

16V

CA

CB

AUTINOR

OP15 300W

OPENING SIGNAL

CLOSING SIGNAL

RE-OPENING SIGNAL

CLOSING NUDGING SIGNAL

SEE BELOW (*)

DIAGNOSTIC PLUG

SLOW DOWN LIMIT ON OPENING [OV-CB]

SLOW DOWN LIMIT ON CLOSING [OV-CA]

OU

INCREMENTAL ENCODER [OV-16V-CA-CB]

+

MOTOR

K3

1234

1234

5678

1234

FAULT SIGNAL

DEFAUTFAULTFEHLER

DIAG.

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE PENDANTUNE MINUTE APRES MISE HORS TENSION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DURING ONEMINUTE WHEN THE ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

BEI FEHLENDER ABDECKUNG BLEIBEN DIETEILE EINE MINUTE NACH ABSCHALTUNG

EN L'ABSENCE DU COUVERCLE

HAS BEEN CUT, IN THE ABSENCE OF THE

DER STROMZUFUHR SPANNUNGSFÜHREND

COVER

K4

K5

SCREEN CABLE(0,75 mm² [ref AUTINOR : 3444]

Page 120: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 22

VVVF DOOR DRIVE OP15 2/2 (*) For the Slow limit contacts, 2 choices:

A Slow down limit on opening which is connected to K5 on 0V [1] and CB [4].A Slow down limit on closing which is connected to K5 on 0V [1] and CA [3].And a relay which give the re-opening, to K3 between [1] and [2].The box give equally 1 contact (NO) available on the terminal K3.

Programme:

OP15 R xx

ORAn Incremental Encoder mounted on the door motor which is connected to K5on 0V [1], 16V [2], CA [3] and CB [4].The OP15 deliver to the controller a simulation of the:

• OPening End Limit contact (ELOP [FCOU]) between [1] and [2] to the K3terminal,

• And CLosing End Limit contact (ELCL [FCFE)) between [3] and [4] to theK3 terminal.

Programme:

OP15 I xx

NOTE: The VVVF / Motor link should be made with a SCREEN CABLE and as short aspossible.

(The screen cable is not delivered but available as a spare part [ref AUTINOR: 3444])

IMPERATIVESeparate the conductors carrying large current and those carrying

electric information at low current.For more information refer you at the documentation [ref AUTINOR: ????)

Page 121: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 23

ID 30 MODEL, CAR POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

ID 30

CREP

24R0V

BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24R

KC24

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

ID 30 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 122: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 24

ID 50-1 MODEL, CAR POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

CREP

24R0V

ID 50-1

CREP

24R0V

BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24R

KC24 (ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

ID 50-1 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 123: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 25

ID 50 MODEL, CAR POSITION INDICATOR

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

ID 50BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24R

KC24

CREP

24R0V

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E1)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

ID 50 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 124: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 26

IDFL 30 / 50 MODEL, CAR POSITION INDICATORWITH ARROWS

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15

CREP

CREP0V

24RFMFD

CREP0V

24R

CREP

24R0V

FD FM 24R

IDFL 30 / 50

FDFM

FMFD

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E5)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(E3)

(E1)

(E5)

(E1)

KC24K24

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

IDFL 30 / 50 model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFLevel 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car Position

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Theoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 125: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 27

STANDARD PROGRAMMING

EXAMPLE: Configuration for an installation of 8 LEVELS including 2 BASEMENT.If at Level 2 - Ground Level (Address 2A), we desire « RC » displayed, we program 1C to parameter

address 2A (REPTxx : REPeaTer at level xx).

Level Address15 3714 3613 3512 3411 3310 329 318 307 2F6 2E5 2d4 2C3 2b2 2A1 290 28

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

Displayed ondigital indicator

Code to beprogrammed

into thecontroller

0 00 13 0d ES 1A1 01 14 0E RJ 1b2 02 15 0F RC 1C3 03 16 10 RH 1d4 04 17 11 RB 1E5 05 18 12 SS 1F6 06 19 13 P0 207 07 -0 14 P1 218 08 -1 15 P2 229 09 -2 16 P3 2310 0A -3 17 RS 2411 0b -4 18 ME 2512 0C -5 19

Select address 2A corresponding to the 2nd level withPush buttons.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF1

1 second later, a value is displayed, if this value suits you(our example 1C) Don’t change it, if not, slide theADR/DON - MODIF switch to MODIF

ADR/DON

MODIF

2

Modify the value to obtain 1C to display « RC » at the 2ndlevel.Register the new value by pushing and releasing bothbuttons at the same time.

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF3

Slide the ADR/DON - MODIF switch to ADR/DON

The new value is memorised.

ADR/DON

MODIF 4

Page 126: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 28

IDFL 30 / 50 MD MODEL, CAR POSITION INDICATOR WITHSCROLLING MESSAGES ARROWS

REPTxxREPeaTerat level xxAdd. 28 to 37

To program if necessary.The indicator codes are supplied

with the digital indicators.

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

BG15

CREP

CREP 24R

24R

IDFL 30 / 50 MD

CREP

24R0V

CREP0V

24R

KC24

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(ALIM)

0V(COM)

(E3)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

Program

WARNING!

indicator with scrollingThe command of the

needs the 'V15'messages arrows

programm or posterior

IDFL 30 / 50 MD model, position indicator connection

POSLOGTheoretical

POSitionof the lift

Add. 24

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Ex : The car is at 1st level, the car indicator display 1but the theoretical position display 3.

Level 0Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5

2nd Basement1st BasementGround Level

1st Level2nd Level3rd Level

Car PositionTheoretical

« Theoretical position » preview

Page 127: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 29

POSITION INDICATOR WITH SCROLLING MESSAGESARROWS PROGRAMMING

Repère du graphisme

40 Ø Ø Ø Ø41 1 1 1 142 2 2 2 243 3 3 3 344 4 4 4 445 5 5 5 546 6 6 6 647 7 7 7 748 8 8 8 849 9 9 9 94A 1 Ø 1 Ø 1Ø 1 Ø4B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14C 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 24D 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 34E 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 44F 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 550 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 651 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 752 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 853 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 954 - Ø - Ø - Ø - Ø55 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 156 - 2 - 2 - 2 - 257 - 3 - 3 F - 358 - 4 - 4 U B - 459 - 5 - 5 B - 55A E S F E E S5B R J H G R J5C R C U L G R C5D R H B M R H5E R B E L B R B5F S S G A S S60 P 0 K C P 061 P 1 L G D P 162 P 2 M B 1 P 263 P 3 O G B 2 P 364 R S P O S R S65 M E U G 2 Ø M E66 P 4 W 2 1 P 467 P 5 E G 2 2 P 568 P 6 D G 2 3 P 669 P 7 S G - 3 P 76A P 8 U 1 U G P 86B P 9 U 2 P P 96C 2 Ø O 1 H 2 Ø6D 2 1 O 2 K 2 16E 2 2 O 3 L 2 26F 2 3 O 4 B 3 2 3707172 AUSSER BETRIEB OUT OF SERVICE SIN SERVICIO

73 BRANDFALLSTEUERUNG FIRE CONTROL BOMBEROS74 SONDERFAHRT SPECIAL SERVICE PRIORIDAD CABINA

MDCREP7MDCREP1 MDCREP3 MDCREP4

MDCREP4-P MDCREP4-C MDCREP7-P MDCREP7-C

HORS SERVICESERVICE INCENDIE

CABINE RESERVEEMDCREP1-P MDCREP1-C

75 LIBRE SURCHARGE ELECTRA VITORIAOVERLOADIN BETRIEB ÜBERLAST IN SERVICEMDCREP3-P MDCREP3-C

GB SPF D

Page 128: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 30

FL 30 / 50 MODEL, CAR DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FM 0V 24R

FL 30 / 50

FM

24R0V

FD

BG15

KC29K24

FD

FM

24R0V

FD

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(E1)

(ALIM)

(COM)

(E3)

(E1)

FIXED IN BOTTOM BOX

FIXED IN FRONTor

FL 30 / 50 model, direction arrows connection

FM & FDUp arrow &Down arrow

Add. 15Seg. 4 and 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

FMFD

Direction arrows preview

Page 129: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 31

MODEL WITH LIGHT LESS THAN TO 1,2 W (TOTAL 2,4 WMAX), CAR DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

FD0V

FM

K24

BG15

Light 24 V1,2 W max.

Connect 1 P217 boxPER SENS

WARNING !!!

PER SENSDont forget thepossible arrows

on landing

In case of overload of theadmissible nominal

power (1,2 W)

(see page 2/2)

Direction arrows connection

FM & FDUp arrow &Down arrow

Add. 15Seg. 4 and 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

FMFD

Direction arrows preview

Page 130: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 32

MODEL WITH LIGHT SUPERIOR TO 1,2 W (TOTAL 2,4 W MAX),CAR DIRECTION ARROWS

FLCLIGDirection

indicator flashingAdd. 08Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

Light 24 V1,2 W max.

Connect 1 P217 boxPER SENS

WARNING !!!

PER SENSDont forget thepossible arrows

on landing

In case of overload of theadmissible nominal

power (1,2 W)

(see page 1/2)

BG15

123

1112 14

22 21 24

123

1112 14

22 21 24

FM24R

0VFD

P217

K26K24

ARE INTERCONNECTEDTHE TERMINAL BLOCK 2 & 1

ON THE P217 BOARD

Direction arrows connection

Page 131: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 33

INSPECTION MODE (1/3)

GD

GM

0V

INS

GD

GM

INS/

BG15

0V

INS/

Inspection

Normal

GDGM

FE

OU

FF1COI1

KC23

KA13

FREVPARA

2A2 4C

5 6 8A8 10

1C1B

1S

CAR'SOTHER

SAFETY

DOOR CONTROLOPTIONAL

BUTTONSEN 81 § 14.2.1.3

LAST ALINEA

STOP

INS0

0VFF1

COI1

INS4

FREVD

FREVM

4

INS3

FREVMFREVD3

GM

CONTACT

Inspection box

MINIBLOCINSpectionoperation

Add. FFSeg. 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

INS

«6»

« Inspection mode » preview

Page 132: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 34

INSPECTION MODE FOR STANDARD XP P82-511 (2/3)

GD

GM

0V

INS

GD

GM

INS/

BG15

0V

INS/

Inspection

Normal

GDGM

FE

OU

FF1COI1

KC23

KA13

FREVPARA

2A2 4C

5 6 8A8 10

1C1B

1S

STOP

INS0

0VFF1

COI1

INS4FREVD

4

INS3

3

GM

GD

FREVM

CFREV

FREVMFREVD

CFREV

DOOR CONTROLOPTIONAL

BUTTONSEN 81 § 14.2.1.3

LAST ALINEA

CAR'SOTHER

SAFETYCONTACT

Inspection box for STANDARD XP P82-511

MINIBLOCINSpectionoperation

Add. FFSeg. 5

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

INS

«6»

Viewing « Inspection mode »

Page 133: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 35

INSPECTION MODE (3/3)

Inspection box Inspection box with door control buttons, EN 81 § 14.2.1.3

INS, GM & GDINSpection mode

Up (GM)Down (GD)

Add. 0CSeg. 3, 2 & 1

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFGDGMINS

Viewing inspection box

TINSINSpection time

Add. 0D

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

1 sHex

Adjustment of the « Inspection time »

Consequences ofinspection movement

too long

Consequences ofInspection and

emergency modeengaged at the same

time

DEF

BG15

Page 134: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 36

INSPECTION LIMIT SWITCH

FAST SPEED INSPECTION

In France, to fulfil decree n° 95-826 of 30 June 1995, it is advised to install a limit switch for inspection.Distances to fulfil when this device goes on are illustrated below.

TOP OF THE SHAFT

Decree 95-826: 1,50 m minStandard NF P 82-211: 1 m + 0,035 v²

Decree 95-826: 1,80 m minStandard NF P 82-211: no specified

MATERIAL IN SHAFT

Decree 95-826 : 0,80 m maxStandard: no specified

Sling (*)

CAR

> 0,25 m

Surface considered

Standard EN 81 § 8.13.1 b)

ACCESSIBLE SURFACE

> 0,12 m²AND

accessible

(*) The cross head are not considered as work surface because they must not be used during the movement ofthe car (interpretation CEN n° 139)

IGVFast speedinspection

Add. 09Seg. 5

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

IN PROGRAMMING « IGV », THE CAR STARTINSTANTLY IN FAST SPEED (GV) WHEN PUSHING

ON THE PUSH BUTTONS « GM » OR « GD »

Page 135: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 37

FULL LOAD (« NON STOP »)

NS

CONTACTFULL LOADFROM 0V

BG15

KC28

IN CAR

Connection of the « Full load » contact

NSNon stop

Add. 0ESeg. 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Viewing the « Full load » contact

DEF

BG15

Consequences of the « Full load »

Page 136: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 38

CAR OVERLOAD (1/2)

VSUOverload light

onprogrammable

outputsAdd. 78

Seg. 0 to 3

RFOverload buzzer

onprogrammable

outputsAdd. 78

Seg. 4 to 7

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM SPG2on

SPG1on

SPG3on

SPG4on

VSU :

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM SPG2on

SPG1on

SPG3on

SPG4on

RF :

SPG2

24RSPG4

SPG3SPG1

OUTPUTS (SPGX)PROGRAMMABLE

PRODUCE 0V

ATTENTION !!!

SU

OVERLOAD CONTACT

FROM 0V IN CAR

THE OVERLOAD BUZZER AND LIGHTDON'T CONNECTED

ON THE SAME OUTPUTTOGETHER

24V / 1,2WBUZZERK26K23

KC28

SPG2 24RSPG4

SPG3SPG1

K26K23LIGHT

BG15

24V / 1,2W

AND/ORBG15

« Car overload » contact, light and buzzer connection

Page 137: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 39

CAR OVERLOAD (2/2)

SUOverload

Add. 0CSeg. 7

VSU & RFOverload light &Overload buzzer

Add. 15Seg. 2 & 3

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

SU

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIFVSU RF

« Car overload » contact, light and buzzer preview

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

DEF

BG15

« Car overload » consequences

Page 138: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 40

CAR RESERVATION « CAR PRIORITY »

PRIC

CAR PRIORITYKEY

FROM 0V IN CAR

KC28

BG15

« Car reservation » contact connection

PRICCar priority

Add. 0ESeg. 4

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

« Car reservation » contact state preview

DEF

BG15

« Car reservation » consequences

Page 139: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 41

FIREMAN SERVICE LIGHT

VPMPFireman

service lighton

programmableoutputs

Add. 7ASeg. 0 to 3

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM

SPG1sur

SPG3sur

SPG2sur

SPG4sur

SPG2

24R

FIREMANSERVICE LIGHT

24V / 1,2W

BG15

K23 K26

SPG1

SPG4SPG3

Fireman service light connection

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

Page 140: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 42

AUTOMATIC CAR LIGHT TIME (BH07) (1/2)

LUAutomatic light

onprogrammable

outputsAdd. 7B

Seg. 0 to 3

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

PAR

RAM SPG2sur

SPG1sur

SPG3sur

SPG4sur

TPLUAutomatic light

timeAdd. 0C

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

ECRITBG17

10 s

Hex

BG15

OUTPUTSPROGRAMMABLE

PRODUCE 0V

ATTENTION !!!

SPG4SPG3

SPG1

K26K23

SPG2

(H)

RC FILTERSINGLE-PHASE

FUSETIME LAG

dim : 5x20 - 5A

SUPPLY220V

PROTECTED

LU/(G)

OUTPUT

CARLIGHT

PERMANENT

LT(A)

N(B)

+24V

Factoryconnected

Input

Output

Freeterminal

L N(C)(D)

(F)(E)LC N

24RGEMOV

250V

" 5213 "(P213)

Automatic car light time connection

Page 141: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VI - page 43

AUTOMATIC CAR LIGHT TIME (BH07) (2/2)

LUAutomatic light

Add. 13Seg. 6

RAM

PAR

ADR/DON

MODIF

Automatic light state preview

DEF

BG15

Consequences of a configuration error of outputs SPG1, SPG2, SPG3 and SPG4(several functions at the same physical output)

Page 142: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

CHAPTER VII

COMMISSIONINGPROCEDURE

Page 143: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 2

PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED TO CARRY OUT THEAUTOMATIC SET-UP OF LEVELS (1/4)

BEFORE STARTING:

This levelling adjustment is done in INSPECTION (INS) modeand not in MAN. For this connect the inspection wire coming from

the car roof to INS, and bridge MAN and 0V.

Do not put the magnets on the tape, but take them with you, as well as thisinstallation manual.

This automatic relevelling procedure allows you to measure and registerdirectly in the controller the landing heights of each corresponding floor. Each levelcorresponds to an altitude on the slotted tape.

The lowest level is 00 00.

PROCEDURE TO FOLLOW :1) Turn the switch to INS.

2) Switch the MB32 VECTOR power off and then on again.

3) With the left-hand switch of the BG17 communication tool on PAR, programme80 at address E0.

4) Climb onto the car roof and take the lift down to the lowest level. Stop exactly atthe floor level!

5) Press the « STOP » button on the car roof.

6) Press GM and GD at the same time for 5 seconds. You can always correct the last registered height, as long as you have not moved

by more than 20 centimetres.

7) Position the ED magnet above the O03 tape-head at a height (D) correspondingto the slow down distance required (see graph on next page).

Example: If the lift speed is 1.60 m/s, the graph page 3 recommends a slow downdistance (D) between 2 m 00 and 3 m 00, in our example: 2.50 m.

Vn :D :

Nominal speed in metres per second.Slow down distance in metres

Page 144: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 3

PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED TO CARRY OUT THEAUTOMATIC SET-UP OF LEVELS (2/4)

9

0.7

1.6

3

4

6

4.2

2.7

2

10.5

6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

SPEED IN METRES PER SECOND

SLO

W D

OW

N D

ISA

NC

E IN

MET

RES

D maxiD mini

Figure 1 Slow down distance D in relation to the nominal speed

FLOORLEVEL 0

D

BLUE

RED

Figure 2 Positioning of "ED" magnet

Page 145: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 4

PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED TO CARRY OUT THEAUTOMATIC SET-UP OF LEVELS (3/4)

8) Release the « STOP » button on the car roof and go up to level 1 on inspection,stopping exactly at floor level!

9) Press the « STOP » button on the car roof.

10) Press GM and GD at the same time for 5 seconds.

The software will memorise the height corresponding to level 1.

11) Repeat steps 7) to 9) until you reach the highest level.

12) Come back down to the lowest level.

By passing the ED magnets coming down, you automatically load the slow-downdistance used by all levels going up or coming down. In addition the value 80programmed at address E0 will reset to 00 to exit the automatic level set-upprocedure.

13) Move the lift towards the machine room on inspection, and leave the car roof, leavingthe switch still on inspection.

14) Turn the MB32 VECTOR power off and then back on again.

If fault code 61 is shown on the communication tool, a mistake has been madeduring the level set-up procedure, and the whole procedure needs to be done again

...

15) If the fault code 61 does not appear, cut the safety lane.

Copy down each floor height at addresses 80 to 9F in the table on page 5, so that lateron you can check the lift's stopping precision (table 1) and the slow down distanceread at addresses d0 and d1 (table 2).

16) Turn the inspection switch on the car roof to Normal.

17) Return to the machine room.

18) Read the chapter « What to know before starting of at full speed » beforereconnecting the safety lane. In this way you can check that the lift carries outcorrectly its reset sequence.

Page 146: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 5

PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED TO CARRY OUT THEAUTOMATIC SET-UP OF LEVELS (4/4)

Table 1 floor heights

Table 2 slow down distance

CHECK THAT THE SLOW DOWN DISTANCE "D" CORRESPONDS TO THE HEIGHTAT WHICH YOU HAVE POSITIONED THE MAGNETS.

RAM

PAR

ADDRESSESFOR THE 16

FLOORSFLOORHEIGHT

Level 0 : 81 80Level 1 : 83 82Level 2 : 85 84Level 3 : 87 86Level 4 : 89 88Level 5 : 8b 8ALevel 6 : 8d 8CLevel 7 : 8F 8ELevel 8 : 91 90Level 9 : 93 92

Level 10 : 95 94Level 11 : 97 96Level 12 : 99 98Level 13 : 9b 9ALevel 14 : 9d 9CLevel 15 : 9F 9E

SLOW DOWN DISTANCE IN MILLIMETRESAddresses d0 d1

thousands, hundred tens, units

Page 147: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 6

WHAT TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING OFF AT FULL SPEED (1/3)

1) To programme the slow down distance on the vectorial frequency drive.

a) Slow down distance including relevelling speed V0.

Example: you have positioned your magnet at 2.5m, during the level height set-up phaseand the controller shows at addresses D0 and D1: 2512.

b) Slow down distance with direct approach.

Segment 5 at address 00E must be ON.Example: you have positioned your magnet at 2.5m, during the level height set-up phase

and the controller shows at addresses D0 and D1: 2512.

In the controllerAddress D0, D1, Ex : 2512mm

In the driveAddress 008, Ex : 2362mm

~ 150mm

Reduce the D0D1 distance by 150mm andprogramme this value at address 008 on thefrequency drive.These 150mm represent the distance travelledin V0 and the final stopping distanceprogrammed at addresses D2 and D3. In ourexample you should programme 2362 ataddress 008 in the frequency drive.

In the controllerAddress D0, D1, Ex : 2512mm

In the driveAddress 008, Ex : 2512mm

Programme the same value at address 008 inthe vector drive.

Page 148: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 7

WHAT TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING OFF AT FULL SPEED (2/3)

2) To programme the Thermal Protection.

Read the nominal current written on the motor faceplate and copy the valueat address 00D of the drive.

3) Address 00E details (Hardware Option)

Segment 0: Intégrator.Segment 3: MLi.Segment 5: Direct approach.Segment 6: 65°Défault temperature.Segment 7: Mlift 220V.

Page 149: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 8

WHAT TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING OFF AT FULL SPEED (3/3)ABOUT THE CONTROLLER DRIVE:

You need to know in which direction the car will go as soon asyou turn on the power! ! !

When using the tape and O03 tape head, the magnet which was placed at the bottomduring the automatic level set-up plays the role of the special slow-down vane and contactED.

This magnet acts upon the bistable ED mounted on the O03 tape head.

• When the contact is open, the car is below the magnet. After power up, theMB32 VECTOR sends the lift up to cross the magnet which will reset the tape head.

The lift will stop at the next floor where it can slow down before returning to the mainfloor. You can check that the ED contact is open by measuring the DC between the “ - ” and“ b ” terminals on the O03 tape head. The voltage measured should be 0V or 24V(depending on whether beam B is broken or not).

Contact ED is open when the DC voltagemeasured between " - " and " b "is 0V or 24V .ED

ba - +

0 300V

24V

• When the contact is closed, the car is above the magnet. After power up, theMB32 VECTOR sends the car down to cross the magnet which will reset the tape head.

The lift will stop at the next floor where it can slow down before returning to the mainfloor.

You can check that the ED contact is closed by measuring the DC voltage betweenthe “ - ” and “ b ” terminals on the O03 tape head. The voltage measured should be 6V or18V (depending on whether beam B is broken or not).

0 30

6V18V

ED

ba - +

Contact ED is close when the DC voltagemeasured between " - " and " b "is 6V or 18V .

If all values seem coherent, you can carry out your first full speedtest runs by closing the safety lane.

Page 150: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 9

PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT AT FULL SPEED (1/3)I. Adjustment of the Synchronous Speed

At the moment, V2 and the synchronous speed (VSy) are the same value.1) Select address 114 on the frequency drive communication device.2) Carry out a full speed movement, and read the synchronous speed displayed.

Copy this value into parameter Vsy, address 006.

I. Automatic adjustment of the up stopping precisionThis procedure only works in the case of a slow down distance including therelevelling speed V0.1) Send the lift to the lowest level.2) With the left-hand switch of the BG17 communication tool on PAR, programme

40 at address E0. Warning: When you slide the switch back up, E0 will be displayed followed by 42.

3) Send the car up one floor on normal. When the car stops, the value 42 programmed at E0 will reset to 00 to exit the

automatic adjustment procedure.

Warning: The lift may perhaps not be exactly at floor level.This is normal it will be at floor level after the next journey.

III. Automatic adjustment of the down stopping precisionThis procedure only works in the case of a slow down distance including therelevelling speed V0.1) Send the lift to the highest level.2) With the left-hand switch of the BG17 communication tool on PAR, programme

20 at address E0. Warning: When you slide the switch back up, E0 will display followed by 21.3) Send the car down one floor on normal.

When the car stops, the value 21 programmed at E0 will reset to 00 to exit theautomatic adjustment procedure.

Warning: The lift may perhaps not be exactly at floor level.This is normal..., it will be at floor level after the next journey.

To find out the stopping precision at each level, with the left-hand switch of the BG17on RAM, check the height counter at 23 and 22.

The value is given in impulses and in hexadecimal. 1 impulse = 2 millimetres.

RAM

PAR

Height counterat addresses 23 and 22

Example:Sending the car to the very bottom, if youread 00 at 23 and 03 at 22, this means thatthe car stopped 3 impulses (about 6mm) fromthe target (00 03).

Ad 23 = 00 Ad 22 = 03

Page 151: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 10

PARAMETERS ADJUSTMENT AT FULL SPEED (2/3)

IV. Adjustment of the direct approach precisionAt address 00E, segment 5 should be on.

1) Select address 22, with the little left-hand red switch in the RAM (upper) position,and send the lift to the bottom floor. The tape head may show a positive valuee.g. 09 (i.e. 9 impulses x 2mm = 18mm), which means that the car has stopped18mm above floor level.

Increase the value programmed at address 008 (DV2) by this 18mm.If the lift stops after floor level, reduce the value programmed at address 008 (DV2)by these 18mm.

V. Automatic adjustment of the hysterisis zone

This must be done if the lowest level is not the main floor.

1) Position the lift above the ED magnets.2) With the left-hand switch of the BG17 communication tool on PAR, programme

10 at address E0.3) Send the car up one floor and then down one floor, so that the tape-head passes

the ED magnets in both directions.

VI. Positioning of EM magnet at top floorPosition the EM magnet at the slow-down point for the top floor, this may be useful

if the lift does not cross the bottom magnets very often.To carry out this operation, you will need the following elements:

• An O03-2 tape-head.• An N70 interface board for an O03-2 tape-head.• A pair of magnets to position as shown on page 11.

1) During normal operation, when the lift stops exactly at the desired floor, send thelift up to the top floor and position the EM magnets to obtain the desired slow-down distance (the position of the EM magnets is roughly the same as that of theED magnets).

2) If afterwards when coming back to the top floor, the lift does not stop at floorlevel, move the EM magnets to the value corresponding to the reset heigt.

Page 152: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 11

POSITIONING THE EM MAGNETSON THE SLOTTED TAPE (O03-2 TAPE HEAD) (3/3)

DOWN SLOWSPEED ZONE

BOTTOM FLOOR 0

ZONE PVDOWN SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZDEVERDOWN DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE

ZONARDDOWN STOPPING ZONE

ZONARM

UP DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE

FLOOR 2

UP SLOWSPEED ZONE

DOWN SLOWSPEED ZONE

FLOOR F-1

ZONE PVDOWN SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZDEVERDOWN DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE

ZONARDDOWN STOPPING ZONE

ZONE PVUP SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZDEVERUP STOPPING ZONE

ZONARM

UP DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE

TOP

UP SLOWSPEED ZONE ZONE PV

UP SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZDEVERUP STOPPING ZONEFLOOR N

MAGNETBLUE

ED MAGNETRED

MAGNETBLUE

MAGNETRED

Tape-headO03-2

Tape-headO03-2

EM

ED

EM

Page 153: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 12

PARAMETERS TO BE ADJUSTED ON SITEAND CONVERSION TABLE

Reminder of parameters to be checked and improved on site.

• Door 1 timer: Address 41 for door 1 (From 2 to 255 seconds).

• Reopen timer: Address 42 for door 1 (From 1 to 255 seconds).

• Door 2 timer: Address 61 for door 2 (From 2 to 255 seconds).

• Reopen timer: Address 62 for door 2 (From 1 to 255 seconds).

These parameters are programmed in seconds and in hexadecimal, forconversion see the table below.

Conversion table Hexadecimal ⇔ Decimal

Using the table:

Right hand figure0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 151 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 312 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 473 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 634 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 795 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95

Left 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111hand 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127figure 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159A 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175B 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191C 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207D 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223E 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239F 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

To convert a hexadecimal number to a decimal number, find the left hand hexadecimal digit inthe left hand column of the table. Follow along the line until it intersects with the right hand digitto be found in the top row of the table. This value is the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimalnumber required.Example: to convert the hexadecimal number A4 into decimal, follow the row A in the left handcolumn until it intersects with the column 4 in the top row. This is the decimal equivalent of A4,i.e. 164.To convert a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, find the decimal number in the table.The first figure of the hexadecimal number is the digit shown in the left hand column of that line,and the second digit is the digit shown at the top of that column.Example: to find the hexadecimal equivalent of 206, find that value in the table. The hexadecimalequivalent is CE.

Page 154: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 13

Hexadecimal addition table

Using the table:

Result in hex0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 102 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 113 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 124 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 135 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 146 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 157 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 168 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 179 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18A A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19B B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1AC C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1BD D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1CE E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1DF F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E

Result in decimal0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 151 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 162 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 173 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 184 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 195 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 206 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 217 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 228 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 239 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26C 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27D 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28E 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29F 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

To add 2 hexadecimal figures, locate one of these figures in the left-hand column. Follow thecorresponding row along to the right until the intersection with the column of the upper part wherethe second figure is found. The value at the intersection is the desired sum.For example, to add the hex numbers A and 4, find the intersection of the row which contains A inthe first column, with the column that contains 4 in the upper part. The sum of A and 4 is the valueat the intersection, i.e. E.If you have to add 2 figure hex numbers, proceed figure by figure from right to left, and do notforget the equivalent remainders. For example, to add the hex numbers1A and B2, add A to C(result: 16 in hex), which thus gives a remainder of to 1, then add 1 and B (result equal to C), towhich add the remainder 1 to get the final result of D6.The upper table gives the result in hex, the lower table gives the result in decimal.

Page 155: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 14

Hexadecimal multiplication table

Using the table:

Result in hex0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F2 0 2 4 6 8 A C E 10 12 14 16 18 1A 1C 1E3 0 3 6 9 C F 12 15 18 1B 1E 21 24 27 2A 2D4 0 4 8 C 10 14 18 1C 20 24 28 2C 30 34 38 3C5 0 5 A F 14 19 1E 23 28 2D 32 37 3C 41 46 4B6 0 6 C 12 18 1E 24 2A 30 36 3C 42 48 4E 54 5A7 0 7 E 15 1C 23 2A 31 38 3F 46 4D 54 5B 62 698 0 8 10 18 20 28 30 38 40 48 50 58 60 68 70 789 0 9 12 1B 24 2D 36 3F 48 51 5A 63 6C 75 7E 87A 0 A 14 1E 28 32 3C 46 50 5A 64 6E 78 82 8C 96B 0 B 16 21 2C 37 42 4D 58 63 6E 79 84 8F 9A A5C 0 C 18 24 30 3C 48 54 60 6C 78 84 90 9C A8 B4D 0 D 1A 27 34 41 4E 5B 68 75 82 8F 9C A9 B6 C3E 0 E 1C 2A 38 46 54 62 70 7E 8C 9A A8 B6 C4 D2F 0 F 1E 2D 3C 4B 5A 69 78 87 96 A5 B4 C3 D2 E1

Result in decimal0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 152 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 303 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 454 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 605 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 756 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 907 0 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 84 91 98 1058 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 1209 0 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108 117 126 135A 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150B 0 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 110 121 132 143 154 165C 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180D 0 13 26 39 52 65 78 91 104 117 130 143 156 169 182 195E 0 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112 126 140 154 168 182 196 210F 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225

To multiply 2 hex figures, locate one of these figures in the left-hand column of the table. Followthe corresponding row along to the right until the intersection with the column at the upper part tothat where the second figure is located. The value at the intersection is the product sought.The upper table gives the result in hex, the lower table in decimal.For example, the product of the hex number A and 6 is 3C hex and 60 decimal.

Page 156: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 15

Conversion table for segment displays

Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal

0 0 0 0

10 16 1 1

20 32 2 2

30 48 3 3

40 64 4 4

50 80 5 5

60 96 6 6

70 112 7 7

80 128 + 8 8

90 144 9 9

A0 160 A 10

B0 176 B 11

C0 192 C 12

D0 208 D 13

E0 224 E 14

F0 240 F 15To get the equivalent decimal value for a segment configuration, pick out from the tablethe equivalent value to the upper segments and add to it the equivalent lower segments.For example :

= += 176 + 6 = 182

Page 157: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 16

Page 158: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 17

AUTINOR

LLiisstt ooff

•• PPAARRAAMMEETTEERRSS•• IINNPPUUTTSS•• OOUUTTPPUUTTSS• FFAAUULLTT CCOODDEESS

iinn VVEECCTTOORR DDRRIIVVEE

VSC-V02 of 07/03/2000 8 november 2000

Page 159: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 18

Page 160: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 19

WARNING

This manual is deemed correct on going to press. It is linked to the program version shown onthe front page, however this version may evolve without influencing the contents of this manual,which may in itself be changed without prior warning.

The information contained has been scrupulously checked. However AUTINOR declines allresponsibility for error or omission.

Should you notice any discrepancy or unclear description, or if you have any suggestions, wewould appreciate your written comments (by mail or fax) to :

Société AUTINOR - Service DocumentationZ.A. Les Marlières59710 AVELIN

[33] 03-20-62-56-00[33] [email protected]

This manual is the property of AUTINOR, from whom it may be bought (at the above address).It may however by freely copied in order to communicate information to those who might needit.

We can only authorise a complete copy, without addition nor removal of information

Where quotations are taken, the following at least must be noted :

- The company name of AUTINOR,- The program version to which it refers,- The number and date of the original edition.

© Copyright 2000 AUTINOR All rights reserved.

Page 161: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 20

Page 162: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 21

CONTENTS

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (1/7)................................................................. 23EXPLANATION OF INPUTS (1/2) ............................................................................ 30EXPLANATION OF OUTPUTS................................................................................. 32EXPLANATION OF VARIABLES (1/2)...................................................................... 33LIST OF VECTOR PARAMETERS AND FINAL VALUES ........................................ 35LIST OF VECTOR INPUTS/OUTPUTS .................................................................... 37LIST OF VECTOR FAULT CODES .......................................................................... 38

Page 163: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 22

Page 164: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 23

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (1/7).

• Address 000 : V0, V0.

At this address is programmed V0 which can also be used as a relevelling speed.

• Address 001 : ISO, Relevelling speed.

At this address is programmed the relevelling speed.

• Address 002 : INS, Inspection speed.

At this address is programmed the Inspection speed which can also be used as anintermediate speed if V1 is not used.This speed is taken into account when the inspection input (INS/ on K30) is activated(VINS Led lit).

• Address 003 : V1, Intermediate speed V1.

At this address is programmed the Intermediate speed V1.

Units : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : 0,001 m/s Maxi : 0,199 m/s

Factory value : 1/10 of V2

Unit : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : 0,000 m/s Maxi : < V0

Factory value : 0,020 m/s

Unit : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : 0,20 m/s Maxi : 0,60 m/s

Factory value : 0,50 m/s

Unit : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : 0,61 m/s Maxi : < V2

Factory value : 0,61 m/s

Page 165: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 24

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (2/7).

• Address 004 : V2, Full speed V2.

At this address is programmed the Full speed.

• Address 006 : VSy, Synchronous speed.

At this address is programmed the movement speed of the car when the motor turns at itssynchronous speed.

• 1500 t/min for a 4 pole motor • 1000 t/min for a 6 pole motor

Formula :

Calculation of the synchronous speed for a 1500 t/min motor : VSyReductor ration x roping

=×1500

60π d

π = 3,14 - d = diameter of the pulley - Roping = 1 or 2 or 4

• Address 008 : DV2, Slow-down distance on V2.

At this address is programmed the slow-down distance necessary when in full speed V2.

Unit : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : > V1 Maxi : 04,00 m/s

Factory value : Clients specification

Unit : metres per second (m/s)

Mini : 0,000 m/s Maxi : 9,999 m/s

Factory value : Clients specification

Unit : metre (m)

Mini : 0,000 m Maxi : 9,999 m

Factory value : Clients specification

64

3

1.60.7

6

9

12

2.7

4.2

0.50

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3VITESSES EN METRE PAR SECONDE

DIS

TAN

CES

EN

MET

RE

D maxiD mini Figure 3

Slow-down distancevalue (DV2) in fact of

the full speed (V2)

Page 166: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 25

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (3/7).

• Address 00A : Acce, Acceleration.

At this address is programmed the time to reach V2 speed.

• Address 00B : FrArr, Brake time on stopping.

At this address is programmed the time to stabilise the rotor before the brake is dropped.

• Address 00C : FrDem, Brake time on start-up.

At this address is programmed the time during which the rotor is stabilised to allow thebrake to lift correctly before start-up.

• Address 00D : Thermi, Motor thermistor.

At this address is programmed the current at which the electronic thermical relay isactivated. (since programme V02)

The thermal relay switches switch off if the motor intensity (Imot) is higher than the thermalintensity (Ith) for longer than 3,5 seconds or if the motor intensity (Imot) is 1,5 A higherthan the termal intensity (Ith).Imot can be seen at the address 108, page 33.

Unit : second (s)

Mini : 02,0 s Maxi : 25,5 s

Factory value : 03,0 s

Unit : second (s)

Mini : 0,30 s Maxi : 0,80 s

Factory value : 0,5 s

Unit : second (s)

Mini : 0,00 s Maxi : 0,60 s

Factory value : 0,5 s

Unit : Ampere (A)

Mini : ....... A Maxi : ....... A

Factory value : Clients specification

Page 167: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 26

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (4/7).

• Address 00E : Opt, Option.

Segment 7 : ML220V, MLIft 220V. 00E Opt 10000000

Segment 7 is programmed ON when the Vector drive is on a three phase 220Vnetwork.Segment 7 is programmed OFF when the Vector drive is on a three phase 400Vnetwork.

Segment 6 : D65°, Fault T°>65°. 00E Opt 01000000

Segment 6 is programmed ON to increase the radiator temperature detection thresholdfrom 60°C to 65°C.

Segment 6 is programmed OFF to keep the detection threshold at 60°C.

Segment 5 : APPDIR, Direct Approach. 00E Opt 00100000

Segment 5 is programmed ON to remove V0 so that the car can level with directapproach.Segment 5 is programmed OFF if this is not desired.

Segment 4 : RETSEC, Delay on safety contactor. 00E Opt 00010000

Segment 4 is programmed ON to filter the rebound of the S contactor contacts on start-up, and when these contacts are used to cut the motor power supply.Segment 4 is programmed OFF when the S contacts are not used to control the motor.

Segment 3 : MLI, V.F. + « NON AUTINOR » Controller. 00E Opt 00001000

Segment 3 is programmed ON when the B32 is associated to an other controller thanAUTINOR.Segment 3 is programmed OFF when the B32 is associated to an AUTINOR controllerusing the slotted tape.

Segment 2 : BATERI, Battery. 00E Opt 00000100

Option available later in 1999Segment 2 is programmed ON to activate the emergency return to floor level using batterypower supply. This option requires an extra, emergency power supply.

Segment 1 : NOBAND, No slotted tape. 00E Opt 00000010

Segment 1 is programmed ON when there is no tape or O03 tape-head. In this case, ahigh speed tachometer is required.Segment 1 is programmed OFF when the speed information cames from the slottedtape and O03 tape-head.

Page 168: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 27

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (5/7).

Segment 0 : IG, Integrator. 00E Opt 00000001

Segment 0 is programmed ON when the B32 slip integrator is to be activated.Segment 0 is programmed OFF if this is not desired .

• Address 010 : Modele, B32 Model.

At this address is programmed the B32 model number. See the sticker on the Plexiglas oron the current measuring device label (VEC02M).

• Address 012 : IFlux, Maximum flux current.

At this address is programmed the maximum flux current. Normally, this current ismeasured with no load at 1500 tr/mn. This measurement is rarely possible on site, so the« empirical » method is to program the number of horsepower as found on the motorplaque.Example :

If the motor plaque says 12 HP ⇒ Program 12,0If the motor plaque says 12 kW, transform into HP, 12 / 0,736 = 16,3 ⇒ program 16,3

• Address 014 : IFmin, minimum flux current.

At this address is programmed the minimum flux current, which is approximately one halfof the maximum flux current (see address 012). This parameter decreases the motorvibrations at low frequency.

Unit : None

Mini : 2 Maxi : 9

Factory value : Clients specification

Unit : Ampere (a)

Mini : 000,1 A Maxi : 999,9 a

Factory value : Clients specification

Unit : Ampere (a)

Mini : 000,1 A Maxi : 999,9 a

Factory value : IFlux / 2 = (A)

Page 169: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 28

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (6/7).

• Address 016 : Gliss, Motor Slip.

At this address is programmed the motor slip.Example of the slip calculation :

For a 4 pole motor, 50 Hz, which without slip would turn at 1500 rpm, yet the motorplaque states 1380 rpm,

the slip will be 1500 1380

15000,08 ie 8%

−= ⇒ Program 08,0 %

If the RPM is not shown, use the table below once you have calculated the Id / In ratio(starting current / nominal current)

• Address 024 : NCode, Number of encoder impulses.

At this address is programmed the number of incremental encoder impulses.

• Address 026 : NPole, Number of motor pole.

At this address is programmed the number of motor pole.

Unit : percent (%)

Mini : 02,0 % Maxi : 20,0 %

Factory value : 1500 13801500

0,08 soit 8%−

=

IdIn

GlissAd 016

2,5 10 %3,5 8 %4 5 %5 3 %

Unit : None

Mini : 500 Maxi : 2500

Factory value : 500 (500 < x < 2500)

Unit : None

Mini : 004 Maxi : 006

Factory value : 4 or 6 poles, if 6 poles, Ncode = 750 min

Page 170: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 29

EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS (7/7).• Address 027 : Country, Language.

At this address can be programmed the language to be used on the VEC03 programmingtool.

* In Germany, the Inspection speed can go up to 0,80 m/s and the levelling speed up to0,50 m/s.

• Address 034 : Dem, Number of starts. . => 0 0 0 0 x x x x

At this address, can be read the number of starts carried out by the lift and the 4 strongweight bits can be modified.

• Address 036 : Dem, Number of starts. => x x x x 0 0 0 0

At this address, can be read the number of starts carried out by the lift and the 4 lightweight bits can be modified.

• Address 041 : Test, Transistor test.

At this address, can be written 55 to check the transistors.All of the LEDs turn red if all of the transistors are working properly.

• Address 042 : Prog, Type of Programme.

At this address, the selected programme can be read.VEC (VECtoriel) Vector, SCA (SCAlaire), ARB (ARBre lent) Gear Less.

• Address 043 : TMan, Type of Controller.

At this address, the type of controller associated with the B32 can be read.Normal (AUTINOR Controller or with a VEC06 interface board),

1Vit (1 speed controller), 2Vit (2 speed controller)

• Address 044 : Mcode, Memorisation of a personal code number.

At this address can be memorised a personal code number to program against all chanceintervention. The equipment set with the factory code 0000 allowing complete andpermanent access to the set of settings.After programming your code (Don’t forget to take note of it), the address 044 disappears.If you want to modify the settings, enter your Code at the address 046.

• Address 046 : Code, Access Code.

At this address, enter your Code to unlock the address 044 in order to modify the settingand/or change the memorised code.

Possible choice : France, English, Deutsch *, Español

Page 171: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 30

EXPLANATION OF INPUTS (1/2)

• Address 100 : En1, Inputs 0 to 7.

Segment 7 : NOT USED. 100 En110000000

Segment 6 : V2, Speed V2. (Full speed) 100 En101000000

Indicates the State of the input for speed V2.Segment 6 lights up when the lift is required to move at speed V2.Segment 6 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 5 : V1, Speed V1. (Intermediate speed) 100 En100100000

Indicates the State of the input for speed V1.Segment 5 lights up when the lift is required to move at speed V1.Segment 5 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 4 : V0, Speed V0. 100 En100010000

Indicates the State of the input for speed V0.Segment 4 lights up when the lift is required to move at speed V0.Segment 4 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 3 : INS, Inspection speed. 100 En100001000

Indicates the State of the inspection input.Segment 3 lights up when the lift is required to move on inspection.Segment 3 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 2 : VISO, Relevelling speed. 100 En100000100

Indicates the State of the relevelling input. (VISO+ & VISO-)Segment 2 lights up when the lift is required to relevel.Segment 2 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 1 : DE, Down. 100 En100000010

Indicates the State of the Down input.Segment 1 lights up when the lift is required to go down.Segment 1 is not lit otherwise.

Page 172: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 31

EXPLANATION OF INPUTS (2/2)

Segment 0 : MO, Up. 100 En100000001

Indicates the State of the Up input.Segment 0 lights up when the lift is required to go up.Segment 0 is not lit otherwise.

• Address 102 : En2, Inputs 0 to 7.

Segment 7 : NOT USED. 102 En210000000

Segment 6 : NOT USED. 102 En201000000

Segment 5 : CCL, L Contactor Check. 102 En200100000

Indicates the State of the Line Contactor.Segment 5 lights up when the Line contactor is de-energised.Segment 5 it is not lit when the Line contactor is energised.

Segment 4 : CCS, S Contactor Check. 102 En200010000

Indicates the State of the Safety Contactor.Segment 4 lights up when the Safety contactor is de-energised.Segment 4 it is not lit when the Safety contactor is energised.

Segment 3 : NOT USED. 102 En200001000

Segment 2 : NOT USED. 102 En200000100

Segment 1 : CAA, Tape-head O03 - Beam A. 102 En200000010

Indicates the State of the Beam A (Top Beam) on the O03 tape-head.Segment 1 lights up when the Beam A is cut.Segment 1 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 0 : CAB, Tape-head O03 - Beam B. 102 En200000001

Indicates the State of the Beam B (Bottom Beam) on the O03 tape-head.Segment 0 lights up when the Beam B is cut.Segment 0 is not lit otherwise.

Page 173: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 32

EXPLANATION OF OUTPUTS

• Address 101 : Sor, Outputs 0 to 7.

Segment 7 : RISO, Re-levelling Fault Relay.

101 Sor 10000000

Indicates the State of the re-levelling fault relay output (RISO on VEC06 board or controllerinput). Segment 7 lights up when the re-levelling fault relay output is activated. Segment 7 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 6 : FR, Brake relay. 101 Sor 01000000

Indicates the State of the Brake relay output (BR).Segment 6 lights up when the brake relay output is activated.Segment 6 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 5 : DFP, Fault Relay (Temporary).

101 Sor 00100000

Indicates the State of the Fault relay output (DEF on VEC06 board or controller input). Segment 5 lights up when the fault relay output is activated. Segment 5 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 4 : DFI, Fault Relay (Definitive).

101 Sor 00010000

Indicates the State of the Fault relay output (DEF on VEC06 board or controller input). Segment 4 lights up when the fault relay output is activated. Segment 4 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 3 : STOPR, Stop VVVF.

101 Sor 00001000

Indicates the State of the Frequency Drive. Segment 3 lights up when the Frequency drive is OFF. Segment 4 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 2 : VENT, Fan relay. 101 Sor 00000100

Indicates the State of the Fan relay output. (VENT).Segment 2 lights up when the fan relay output is activated.Segment 2 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 1 : S, Safety relay. 101 Sor 00000010

Indicates the State of the Safety relay output (S).Segment 1 lights up when the safety relay output is activated.Segment 1 is not lit otherwise.

Segment 0 : L, Line relay. 101 Sor 00000001

Indicates the State of the Line relay output (L).Segment 0 lights up when the line relay output is activated.Segment 0 is not lit otherwise.

Page 174: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 33

EXPLANATION OF VARIABLES (1/2)

• Address 103 : T°, Radiator Temperature in degrees Celsius (°)

At this address can be read the power transistors cooling radiator temperature.

• Address 104 : TCont, Capacitor Current in Volts (V)

At this address can be read the D.C. net capacitor terminal current.

• Address 108 : Imot, Motor Current in Amps (A)

At this address can be read the current in each phase of the motor.

• Address 10A : DV0, V0 stopping distance in metres (m)

At this address can be read the distance necessary to smooth V0 into zero speed.

• Address 10B : Diso, Relevelling stopping distance in metres (m)

At this address can be read the distance necessary to smooth VISO into zerospeed.

• Address 10C : DIns, Inspection slow-down distance in metres (m)

At this address can be read the slow-down distance associated with the inspectionspeed VINS.

• Address 10E : DV1, V1 slow-down distance in metres (m)

At this address can be read the slow-down distance associated with theintermediate speed V1.

• Address 110 : Fre, Frequency sent to the motor in Hertz (Hz)

At this address can be read the instantaneous frequency applied to the motor.

• Address 112 : Con, reference in Hertz (Hz)

At this address can be read the reference/Ideal frequency to be followed.

Page 175: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 34

EXPLANATION OF VARIABLES (2/2)

• Address 114 : Vt, Lift speed in metres per second (m/s)

At this address can be read the car speed.

• Address 116 : Codeur, Incremental encoder no Unit

At this address can be read the counting of the incremental encoder mounted on themotor.

• Address 118 : Recup, Energy regeneration in percent (%)

At this address can be read the percentage of energy consumed in the xregenerative resistors. (x = number of regenerative resistors depending of the drive model)

• Address 11A : Tmot, motor power supply current in percent (%)

At this address can be read the power current applied to the motor.

• Address 120 : GD, Deceleration Gradient in V2 speed in metre per second squared (m/s²)

At this address can be read the deceleration slope associated with the differentspeed.

• Address 122 : DRal, Slow-down distance in metre (m)

At this address can be read the slow-down distance still to run.

• Address 12A : I Cap1, Current measuring device 1 no Unit

At this address can be read the information given by the current measuring device 1

Note : At Stop the information should be between 500 and 524.

• Address 12C : I Cap2, Current measuring device 2 no Unit

At this address can be read the information given by the current measuring device 2.

Note : At Stop the information should be between 500 and 524.

• Address 12E : I Cap3, Current measuring device 3 no Unit

At this address can be read the information given by the current measuring device 3.

Note : At Stop the information should be between 500 and 524.

Page 176: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 35

LIST OF VECTOR PARAMETERS AND FINAL VALUES

* Opt parameter Detail - OPTion - Address 00E : page 26.

Address Name Designation Minvalues

Maxvalues Factory values Finals

Values Page

000 V0 Set-up speed 0,001 0,199 1/10 de V2 23

001 Iso Re-levelling speed 0,000 < V0 0,020 m/s 23

002 Ins Inspection speed 0,20 0,60 0,50 m/s 23

003 V1 Intermediary speed 0,61 < V2 0,61 m/s 23

004 V2 Full speed > V1 03,00 Clients specification (m/s) 24

006 VSy Synchronous speed 0,000 9,999 Clients specification (m/s) 24

008 DV2 V2 Slow down distance 0,000 9,999 Clients specification (m) 24

00A Acce Acceleration 02,0 25,5 3,0 s 25

00B FrArr Brake stopping time 0,30 0,80 0,5 s 25

00C FrDem Brake starting time 0,00 0,60 0,5 s 25

00D Thermi Motor thermistor (A) Clients specification (A) 25

00E Opt Hardware option Clients specification (m/s) 26

00F RgT° Temperature Sonde Calibration 0 10 4 °C

010 Model Vector model 2 9 Clients specification 27

011 Tmor Transistor pause time 1,5 µs

012 IFlux Flux current max 000,1 999,9 Number of horse power (A) 27

014 IFmin Flux current min 000,1 999,9 IFlux / 2 = (A) 27

016 Gliss Motor slip 02,0 20,0 1500 RPM

1500100

−× = %

28

017 ETFDM0 Up starting brake time difference 0,00 2,55 0,00 s

018 Jreg Inertia 005 %

019 GP max Max Proportional Gain > 12 Hz 015

01A GP min Min Proportional Gain < 12 Hz 004

01B GI max Max integral Gain 010

01C GI min Min integral Gain 001

01D AFLuD Additional starting Flux 00,0 A

01E GI Dep Start up integral Gain 005

01F GP Dep Start up Proportional Gain 005

020 T Dema Start up Voltage 006 %

021 G Stabi Stabilisation Gain 015

022 FTmax Max Voltage Frequency 050 Hz

023 FMinD Min Starting Frequency 0,10 Hz

024 NCode N° Encoder Teeth 0500 2500 500 (500 < x < 2500) 28

026 NPole N° of motor Poles 004 006 4 or 6 poles(if 6 poles, NCode=750mini)

28

027 Country Country Language F DGB SP,,, 29

Address Name Seg 7 Seg 6 Seg 5 Seg 4 Seg 3 Seg 2 Seg 1 Seg 000E Opt ML220V D65° APPDIR RETSEC MLI BATERI NOBAND IG

FACTORY VALUE 0 0 0 0 0 or 1 0 1 0

FINAL VALUE

Page 177: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 36

LIST OF VECTOR PARAMETERS AND FINAL VALUES

* You can visualise the parameters, inputs/outputs, variables as well as the functiongraphs on a P.C., using the P313 interface board and the VISU P.C. programme.

To do this, connect the P313 set and push the 2 end buttons of the integrated diagnostictool VEC03. In order to make « READ PARAMETERS » appear on the display.At the end on the P.C. visualisation, push the 2 end buttons.

AUTINOR

MODIF. CLEAR VALID.1000 100 10 1

+SOFTWARE

P313

VISUPC (LOCAL)

P.C.

VEC01

If the diagnostic tool is integrated in the VVVF,it is ESSENTIAL to press the 2 end buttons.

READ PARAMETERS

You can visualise :

Address Name Designation MinValues

MaxValues Factory Values Finals

Values Page

028 PileDef Fault 1

029 PileDef Fault 2

02A PileDef Fault 3

02B PileDef Fault 4

02C PileDef Fault 5

02D PileDef Fault 6

02E PileDef Fault 7

02F PileDef Fault 8

030 PileDef Fault 9

031 PileDef Fault 10

034 Dem Number of starts(Full load)

0000 9999 0000xxxx 29

036 Dem Number of starts(Empty)

0000 9999 xxxx0000 29

038 Visu1 * VISU n° 1 Address PROGRAMMATION F912

039 Visu2 * VISU n° 2 Address OF THE CURVES F910

03A Visu3 * VISU n° 3 Address VISUALISED F904

03B Visu4 * VISU n° 4 Address ON COMPUTER F908

040 HinTen Disable of voltage control 00

041 Test Transistor Test(Program 55 for test)

00 29

042 Prog Programme Type VEC, SCA, ARB 29

043 TMan Controller Type Normal, 1 speed, 2 speed 29

044 Mcode Code no memory 0000 29

046 Code Code no entry 0000 29

• The theoretical graph : ................................................ F912• The real graph :........................................................... F910• The capacitor voltage :................................................ F904• The efficient motor current : ........................................ F908

Page 178: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 37

LIST OF VECTOR INPUTS/OUTPUTSAddress Name Seg 7 Seg 6 Seg 5 Seg 4 Seg 3 Seg 2 Seg 1 Seg 0 Page

Inputs 1

100 En1 V2 V1 V0 INS VISO DE MO 30Outputs

101 Sor RISO BR DFP DFI STOPR VENT S L 32Inputs 2

102 En2 CCL CCS CAA CAB 31

103 T° Radiator Temperature (°C) 33104 TCond Capacitor voltage (v) 33108 Imot Motor Intensity (A) 3310A DV0 V0 Stopping distance (m) 3310B Diso ISO Relevelling Stopping distance (m) 3310C DIns Slow down distance in inspection speed (m) 3310E DV1 Slow down distance in speed V1 (m) 33110 Fre Frequency serf by the motor (Hz) 33112 Con Theoretical / reference (Hz) 33114 Vt Lift Speed (m/s) 34116 Codeur Incremental encoder 34118 Recup Energy recovery (%) 3411A TMot Motor power voltage (%) 34120 GD V2 Speed slow down gradient (m/s²) 34122 DRal Slow down distance (m) 3412A I Cap1 Intensity measurement device 1 (VEC12) 3412C I Cap2 Intensity measurement device 2 (If VEC02M) 3412E I Cap3 Intensity measurement device 3 (VEC12) 34

Page 179: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 38

LIST OF VECTOR FAULT CODESFAULTS DISPLAYED BY THE VECTOR DRIVE (VEC01 Board)

The B32 fault code stack is found at Address 28, 29, 2A, 2B, 2B, 2C, 2D, 2E,2F, 30 and 31. At Address 28 the most recent fault and at Address 31 the oldestrecorded fault.

BEFORE LEAVING THE SITE, SET THE FAULT LIST BACK TO 00.IN THIS WAY YOU CAN KEEP BETTER TRACK OF ANY BREAKDOWNS.

WARNING :PLEASE TAKE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU SEND US YOUR ELECTRONIC BOARDS

(USE ANTI-STATIC BAGS)

FAULTN°

DESIGNATION VISUALISATION

-00- FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY. No fault-10- INVERSION IN THE ROTATION DIRECTION (DETECTED BY THE

TAPE HEAD)Phase inversion

-11- CONSEQUENCE OF A AND B SIGNALS CHANGING STATE ATTHE SAME TIME

Tape headfault

-22- SLIP INTEGRATOR. Integrator-52- « 10 » CUT WHILE IN MOTION. 10 cut while

in motion-62- FAULT WITH THE O03 TAPE HEAD. Tape head

counting irrational-77- “S” CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED. Contactor not realising-78- “S” CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED Not programmed-80- POWER SUPPLY CAPACITOR (tc) MISSING AT START-UP. Current < 450 v at start-up-81- AVERAGE CURRENT HIGHER THAN ALLOWED CURRENT. Thermistor-82- REAL SPEED 15% HIGHER THAN PROGRAMMED NOMINAL

SPEED Vn.Speed > 115% of the nominal

speed-83- INSPECTION SPEED EXCEEDS 0,6 M/S. Inspection speed > 0.6 m/s-84- RELEVELLING SPEED EXCEEDS 0,3 M/S. Relevelling speed > 0.3 m/s-85- REGENERATIVE POWER EXCEEDS 650V (BRAKE CIRCUIT

FAULT)Regeneration

-86- MISSING POWER SUPPLY DURING MOVEMENT COMMAND(FUSE BLOWN OR CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED.

No power while in motion

-87- “LINE” CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED. Contactor not realising-88- SIMULTANEOUS « UP » AND « DOWN » COMMAND. Simultaneous

up and down-89- RADIATOR TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 40 °. Radiator T°-90- AC CURRENT EXCEEDS MAX TRANSISTOR CURRENT. Power supply too high-91- TRANSISTOR N°1 FAULT. (TOP) Transistor N°1 (Top)-92- TRANSISTOR N°2 FAULT. Transistor N°2-93- TRANSISTOR N°3 FAULT. Transistor N°3-94- TRANSISTOR N°4 FAULT. Transistor N°4-95- TRANSISTOR N°5 FAULT. Transistor N°5-96- TRANSISTOR N°6 FAULT. (BOTTOM) Transistor N°6 (Bottom)-97- REGENERATIVE TRANSISTOR FAULT. Regenerative Transistor fault-98- PARAMETER FAULT Parameter fault-99- EEROM WRITING FAULT. Eerom writing fault

-100- MOTOR INTENSITY > MAXI INTENSITY. Motor intensity > Max-101- INCREMENTAL ENCODER FAULT. Encoder fault-102- INCREMENTAL ENCODER SPEED +/- 15% FAULT. Encoder speed +/- 15% Advised-103- DIRECT APPROACH FAULT. MLIFT stop on

V0 movement-104- CURRENT MEASURING DEVICE NOT CONNECTED Not programmed

-AUTRE- NON PROGRAMMED FAULT. Not programmed

Page 180: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 39

AUTINOR

LLiisstt ooff•• PPAARRAAMMEETTEERRSS•• IINNPPUUTTSS•• OOUUTTPPUUTTSS•• FFAAUULLTT CCOODDEESS

iinn SSeerriieess 3322

PA-VA-DE.DGB 21 December 2000

Page 181: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 40

Page 182: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 41

WARNING

This manual is deemed correct on going to press. It is linked to the program version shown onthe front page, however this version may evolve without influencing the contents of this manual,which may in itself be changed without prior warning.

The information contained has been scrupulously checked. However AUTINOR declines allresponsibility for error or omission.

Should you notice any discrepancy or unclear description, or if you have any suggestions, wewould appreciate your written comments (by mail or fax) to:

Société AUTINOR - Service documentationZ.A. Les Marlières59710 AVELIN

[33] 03-20-62-56-00[33] [email protected]

This manual is the property of AUTINOR, from whom it may be bought (at the above address).It may however by freely copied in order to communicate information to those who might needit.

We can only authorise a complete copy, without addition nor removal of information

Where quotations are taken, the following at least must be noted:

- the company name of AUTINOR,- the program version to which it refers,- the number and date of the original edition.

© Copyright 2000 AUTINOR All rights reserved.

Page 183: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 42

Page 184: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 43

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS.................................................................................... 44INPUTS DEFINITIONS............................................................................................. 77OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS......................................................................................... 87

CONVERSION TABLE HEXADECIMAL ⇔ DECIMAL .................................. 94CONTROLLER PARAMETERS TABLE (1/2) ........................................................... 95CONTROLLER INPUTS / OUTPUTS TABLE........................................................... 97FAULT CODES LIST (1/3)........................................................................................ 98

CONTENTS

Page 185: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 44

PARAMETER DEFINITIONSTo read and modify the parameters, it is necessary to put the little switch on the left

to the down position, called PAR.

Before the word ADDRESS, the little PAR switch must be down, and RAM must beup. Now we can define the contents of the parameters. It is then necessary to put the littleswitch down.

The small dot at the bottom to the right of the display is now lit.

• Par Address 00: CDDEF (Last Fault Code).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, the Series 32 displays the code of the last fault.

• Par Address 01: CADDEF (Last but-one-fault code).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, the Series 32 displays the last-but-one fault code.

• Par Address 02: Best displayed in segment mode.

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, the Series 32 displays the last-but-one fault code.

See the addresses 5D and 63 to change the values.

The segments of address N°2 cannot be changed directly!!!

Segment 7: REGUL (Control System).

We program segment 7 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to drive an independent speed controlsystem.We program segment 7 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 6: DPLX (DuPLeX).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to be switched into a MULTIPLEXbattery.We program segment 6 to " 0 " if the Series 32 is to work in SIMPLEX.

Segment 5: ISO (Re-levelling).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to drive the RE-LEVELLING option(Open doors and Closed doors).We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 186: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 45

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 4: RMLIFT (Control System MLIFT).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to drive a variable frequency speedcontrol system.We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3: NIVSIN (Levels damaged by fire).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to manage levels damaged by fire.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: DSERVS (Double Selective SERVice).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to manage 2 service selective.

Segment 1: OUAVAR (Open Before Stop).

We program Segment 1 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to carry out the OPEN BEFORE STOPfunction and therefore to control a bridging device from the safety chain.We program Segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0: Not used.

• Par Address 03: NBOPER (Number of Door Operators).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, we program the number of door operators to be operated.As the Series 32 can only control 2 automatic doors, only the values 00, 01 or 02 can beprogrammed.

• Par Address 04: NIVSUP (Upper Level).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, we program the UPPER LEVEL of the installation (total number of levelsminus 1, thus 1 to 15).Here are the conversions between the decimal and hexadecimal numbers 00 to 15 ...... 00to 0F.

00 decimal = 00 hex 08 decimal = 08 hex01 decimal = 01 hex 09 decimal = 09 hex02 decimal = 02 hex 10 decimal = 0A hex03 decimal = 03 hex 11 decimal = 0B hex04 decimal = 04 hex 12 decimal = 0C hex05 decimal = 05 hex 13 decimal = 0D hex06 decimal = 06 hex 14 decimal = 0E hex07 decimal = 07 hex 15 decimal = 0F hex

Page 187: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 46

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 05: NIVINF (Bottom Level).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, we program the BOTTOM LEVEL. (from 00 to 14).For SIMPLEX, we program 00.

For MULTIPLEX, it is possible for one of the cars not to decsend as slow as the others andserves 2 levels less, for example.In this case, we program the upper level to the same value as the others (if all serve thesame height level) and the BOTTOM LEVEL to 02 for one car and to 00 for the secondcar.Example: 8 levels multiplex for the simplex 0 and 6 levels for simplex 1.Simplex 0 serves Level 7, Simplex 1 serves Level 7.Simplex 0 serves Level 6, Simplex 1 serves Level 6.Simplex 0 serves Level 5, Simplex 1 serves Level 5.Simplex 0 serves Level 4, Simplex 1 serves Level 4.Simplex 0 serves Level 3, Simplex 1 serves Level 3.Simplex 0 serves Level 2, Simplex 1 serves Level 2.Simplex 0 serves Level 1, Simplex 1 does not serve Level 1.Simplex 0 serves Level 0, Simplex 1 does not serve Level 0.

• Par Address 06: NIVPRIM (Main Level).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, we program the MAIN LEVEL or RESET LEVEL (from 00 to 15).The reset level is the same as the main level as well as the fireman service level.Remember that in Autinor jargon, the lowest level is level 0.

- if the reset level is at level 0, then program 0.- if the reset level is at level 1, then program 1.- if the reset level is at level 2, then program 2.- etc...- etc...- etc...- if the reset level is at level 15, then program 0F.

See pages 94 for the conversion between decimal and hexadecimal mode(00 to 15 ...... 00 to 0F).

Page 188: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 47

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 07: Best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: BLOCAG (Single Automatic Operation).

We program segment 7 to " 1 " if the Series 32 is to work in single automatic operation.We program segment 7 to " 0 " if the Series 32 is to work in collective.

Segment 6: DCOPRO (Temporary Fault Contactor).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " if we want the Series 32 to give us the TEMPORARYFAULT CONTACTORS.If this is the case, when a contactor fault appears, the Series 32 waits 6 seconds then triesto leave again on a new order.We program segment 6 to " 0 " if we want the Series 32 to give out the definitive faultcontactors.

Segment 5: OPTSP (Landing Suspension Option).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " if the provisional landing suspension is requested.Reminder: This device is for a systematic storage of action on the emergency stop device(cutting of 6) during the travel of the car. In the case of flush shaft, it allows the use of aspring-return button as an in-car stopping device. This is also the only effective means ofcontrol from the light beam threshold protection device. Only new action on a car callbutton will cause the departure and thus make subsequent calls possible. This storage,diagnosed by fault 23, is not carried out when the the car stops at a floor. We programsegment to " 0 " if the provisional landing suspension is not requested.

Segment 4: OPTMAN (Homing Control Option).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 to process the homing controlin machinery mode.We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3: OPREVM (Service Up Option ?).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 to allow a movement UP fordirect inspection after a Reset, while the car is situated above ED.Do not shim the selector if the coded screen is encountered.Do not program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: MPVHZ (Calls in the slow zone).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to allow a call outside the release zone.This possibility is useful in regulation mode leaving the car roof inspection and when alanding call is made to go up.

If the car is stopped in the Slow Speed Zone at the moment when the call is made andwhen the option is programmed, then it will rejoin the level which sometimes causesproblems, depending on the type of control system. If the option is not programmed, thecar will not move and only movement which begins by GV will be allowed.We program segment 2 to " 0 " if we do not want such behaviour.

Page 189: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 48

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 1: OPED (ED Option).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to use the contact ED in the case ofreduced gaps.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0: OUVPRE (Opening upon PREsence).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want the door which is in the process of closingto re-open on the landing call of the level where the car is located. This however, only ifthe call button corresponding to the direction has been pressed. (Re-open upon presence).We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 08: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: 2V (2 speeds).

We program segment 7 to " 1 " if the A/H 32 is to drive a 2-speed motor.We program segment 7 to " 0 " if the A/H 32 is to drive a 1-speed motor.

Segment 7: RECAV1 (Re-positionning in Speed 1) for HB/B 32.

We program segment 7 to " 1 " if we want the Series 32 to re-position in speed 1.We program segment 7 to " 0 " if we want the Series 32 to re-position in speed 2.

Segment 6: APCL (Landing Calls Flashing).

Programming segment 6 to " 1 "results in flashing hall call registration lights.Programming segment 6 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 5: FLCLIG (Direction Indicator Flashing).

Programming segment 5 to " 1 " results in the flashing of the direction or next departureindicators.Programming segment 5 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 4: FLPDP (Next Departure Arrows).

Programming segment 4 to " 1 " results in the Next Departure Arrows.Programming segment 4 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 3: EFFNSEL (Call Cancel Option).

Progamming segment 3 to " 1 " cancels the hall calls independent of direction, i.e. both upand down calls are cancelled.This programming is essential when connecting-up the 1 main landing button to the Upand Down when there is a down collective with basement.Programming segment 3 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Page 190: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 49

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 2: MASMPX (Multiplex Mass).

Programming segment 2 to " 1 " results in the Series 32 SLAVE not taking any notice of aMass Fault.Programming segment 2 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 1: IPF (Re-Levelling with Door Closed).

Programming segment 1 to " 1 "results in re-levelling with closed doors.This function is programmed in relation to address parameter 02 or 63, segment 5.Programming segment 1 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 0: IPO (Re-Levelling with Door Open).

Programming segment 0 to " 1 " results in re-levelling with the door open and can thuscontrol a bridging device from the safety chain.This function is programmed in relation to the address parameter 02 or 63, segment 5.Programming segment 0 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

• Par Address 09: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: GONGAR (GONG on stopping).

Programming segment 7 to " 1 " results in the GONG exit operating when the apparatus isimmobilised.Programming segment 7 to " 0 " results in the GONG exit operating in the Slow SpeedDistance passage.

Segment 6: IGPPRO (Temporary Door Integrator).

Programming segment 6 to " 1 " renders the door integrator fault temporary.Programming segment 6 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 5: IGV (High Speed Inspection).

Programming segment 5 to " 1 " results in high speed inspection.Programming segment 5 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Segment 4: PFLSGV (No Fast Speed Direction Indicator).

Programming segment 4 to " 1 " results in the direction arrows being turned off athigh speed.

Programming segment 4 to " 0 " results in the reverse.

Page 191: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 50

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 3: OPTOM (Fireman Service Option).

Programming segment 3 to " 1 " selects the fireman service option.

Programming segment 3 to " 0 " disables this option.In this case, the Series 32 ignores the state of the fireman service input.

Segment 2: MHSPF (Out of Service Door Closed).

Arriving at the Out of Service Level, the doors will open and close indefinitely until thisfunction is left.Programming segment 2 to " 0 " results in the car parking with the door open, after the Outof Service sign is shown.

Segment 1 and 0: TYPOMP (Type of Fire man Service)

We program in these 2 segments the code of the type of fireman service required.

Call code of the different types of fireman service:

• Par Address 0A: TIG (Time Integrator).

Best displayed in hex mode.At this address, we program the integrator timing in seconds and in hex.

We can program a value from 02 to 45 seconds.

If we program a value under 2 seconds, a value of 02 seconds will be imposed (Norm).

If we program a value over 45 seconds, a value of 45 seconds will be imposed (Norm).

See page 94 for conversion between hex and decimal from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 0C: TPLU (Automatic Light Timing).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At the address 0C, we program the timing of the automatic light in seconds and in hex.

We can program a value from 02 to 255 seconds.

See page 94 for conversion between decimal and hex, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

ENGLISH FIRE SERVICE ...code 01.SWISS FIRE SERVICE ...code 10.FRENCH FIRE SERVICE ...code 00.

Page 192: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 51

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 0D: TINS (Inspection Time).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At the address 0D, we program the maximum time, in seconds and hex, allowed to run oninspection.We can program a value from 01 to 255 seconds.If we stop and then start again, we use this maximum time length again.

If the Series 32 interrupts the movement because we have exceeded the allowed time, it isnecessary to wait this length of time before re-starting the inspection.The same applies for homing control mode.

If the service timing is programmed to 00 then the inspection travelling limitation does notexist.

See page 94 for conversion between hex and decimal, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 0E: TCAPGV (Tape Head Beam Broken Time in Fast Speed).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At this address, we program the maximum allowed during which a tape head beam can beinterrupted in fast speed.

We can program a value from 02 to 25.5 seconds at intervals of 0.1 seconds.

If we program a value under 2 seconds (20 tenths of seconds), a 2 second value will beimposed.

See page 94 for the conversion of hex to decimal from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 0F: TCAPPV (Tape Head Beam Broken Time in Slow Speed).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At address 0F, we program the maximum allowed time during which a tape head beamcan be interrupted in Slow Speed.

We can program a value from 3 to 25.5 seconds at intervals of 0.1 seconds.If we program a value under 3 seconds (30 tenths of seconds) , a 3 second value will beimposed.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 10: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: OPTOM (Car Calls Masking 0 to 7).

We program the corresponding segments to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 to reply tothe corresponding landing calls.We program the corresponding segments to " 0 " when we do not want the Series 32 toreply to the corresponding landing calls.

Page 193: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 52

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 11: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: OPTOM (Car Calls Masking 08 to 15).

• Par Address 12: Not used.

• Par Address 13: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: (Mask the Landing Calls for Up, from levels 0 to 7).

We program the corresponding segments to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 to respondto the corresponding landing calls for up.We program the corresponding segments to " 0 " when we do not want the Series 32 torespond to the corresponding landing calls for up.

• Par Address 14: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 1 to 7: (Mask the Landing Calls for Up, from levels 8 to 15).

• Par Address 15: Not used.

• Par Address 16: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 1 to 7: (Mask the Landing Calls for Down, from levels 1 to 7).

We program the corresponding segments to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 torespond to the corresponding landing calls for down.

We program the corresponding segments to " 0 " when we do not want the Series 32 torespond to the corresponding landing calls for down.

Page 194: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 53

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 17: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: (Mask the Landing Calls for Down, from levels 8 to 15).

• Par Address 18: Not used.

• Par Address 19: (Only with vanes) best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: not used.Segment 6: not used.Segment 5: not used.Segment 4: not used.Segment 3: not used.Segment 2: not used.

Segment 1: PVCRH (Slow Speed Distance crossed at Upper Level).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when the set up of the site is such that it is necessary tocross the Slow Speed Distance of the last upper in-between-level.We program segment 1 to " 0 " when the set up of the site does not impose into theCrossed Slow Speed Distance of the last upper in-between level.Additionally, see the addresses 1A and 1B.

Segment 0: PVCRB (Slow Speed Distance crossed at Lower Level).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when the set up of the site is such that it is necessary tocross the Slow Speed Distance Zones of the last lower in-between level.We program segment 0 to " 0 " when the set up of the site does not impose into theCrossed Slow Speed Distance of the last lower in-between level.Additionally, see addresses 1A and 1B.

• Par Address 19: TPISO (Only with a slotted tape) (Re-Levelling Timing).

Best displayed in hexadecimal mode.At address 19, we program the maximum time for a re-levelling movement.We can program a value from 2 to 10 seconds at intervals of 1 second.If we program a value under 2 seconds, a 2 seconds value will be imposed.If we program a value over 10 seconds, a 10 seconds value will be imposed.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ... 00 to FF.

Page 195: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 54

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 1A: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0: Programming of the Crossed Slow Speed Distance for in-between levels 0 to 1.

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when the set up of the site is such that it is necessary to crossthe Slow Speed distance zones between levels 0 and 1.We program segment 0 to " 0 " when the set up of the site does not impose into the CrossedSlow Speed Distance between levels 0 and 1.

Segment 1: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 1 and 2.Segment 2: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 2 and 3.Segment 3: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 3 and 4.Segment 4: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 4 and 5.Segment 5: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 5 and 6.Segment 6: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 6 and 7.Segment 7: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 7 and 8.

• Par Address 1B: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 8 and 9.Segment 1: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 9 and 10.Segment 2: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 10 and 11.Segment 3: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 11 and 12.Segment 4: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 12 and 13.Segment 5: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 13 and 14.Segment 6: programming of the crossed slow speed distance for between levels 14 and 15.Segment 7: not used.

• Par Address 1C: Not used.

• Par Address 1D: NUSPLX (SimPLeX NUmber). best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the simplex number in case of Multiplex.As the number of apparatus that can be put into an interconnected group is 2, the simplexnumber will go from 00 to 01.

• Par Address 1E: TFR10 (Filtering of 10).

Best displayed in hex mode.At this address, we program the time that runs between the moment where 10 of the safetychain is good, and the moment when movement occurs.

This timing is to filter the mechanical jumps on 10 and can last up to 500 milliseconds.

This timing is programmable at intervals of 10ms and in hex.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

Page 196: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 55

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 1F: TPRAU (Homing Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time it takes from the moment the apparatus is no longersought and its automatic return to a particular level.This time is programmed in seconds and hex.We can program a value from 1 to 255 seconds.

If we program 00, there is no homing.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

As concerns this timing, it is necessary to program the level to which the apparatus mustreturn to address 20.

• Par Address 20: NIVRAU (Homing Level) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program, in hex, the address to which a cabin will return, if it is notsought after a certain delay which is contained in address 1F.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

Segment 5: TRAPM (Lengthened Homing Time).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " if we want the base units of the door timings to extend from1 to 2.5 seconds, thus allowing times from 5 seconds to 10 minutes.We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 21: TGONG (GONG Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the length of time during which the GONG (SPG1 to 3) exit isactivated.This time is programmed at intervals of 0.1 seconds and in hex.

We can program a value from 0.1 to 10 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 00 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 22: COMDEM (Trip Counter) best displayed in decimal.

The Series 32 has a 6 figure trip counter, and so can memorise 999999 movements.Address 22 changes the 2 right-hand figures.

• Par Address 23: COMDEM (Trip Counter) best displayed in decimal.

Address 23 increments the 2 middle figures.

• Par Address 24: COMDEM (Trip Counter) best displayed in decimal.

Address 24 increments the 2 left-hand figures.

Page 197: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 56

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 25: NUMARO (Cabinet Number) best displayed in decimal.

The Series 32 has an " identity card ", formatted in the following way: YEAR /MONTH / POSITION NUMBER.

E.G.: a cabinet with the number 93 / 09 / 57 is a cabinet made in the year 1993, the monthof September and the 57th produced that month.At address 25, we program the position number.

• Par Address 26: NUMAR1 (Cabinet Number) best displayed in decimal.

At address 26, we program the production month.

• Par Address 27: NUMAR2 (Cabinet Number) best displayed in decimal.

At address 27, we program the production year.

• Par Address 28: REPT00 (REPeater at level 00) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the selection code of the character (among those contained inthe REF displays are ID30, ID50, IDFL30, IDFL50) which we want to display at level 0.See the table for the conversion between the different characters it is possible to display.

• Par Address 29: Same for level 01.

• Par Address 2a: Same for level 02.

• Par Address 2b: Same for level 03.

• Par Address 2c: Same for level 04.

• Par Address 2d: Same for level 05.

• Par Address 2e: Same for level 06.

• Par Address 2f: Same for level 07.

• Par Address 30: Same for level 08.

• Par Address 31: Same for level 09.

• Par Address 32: Same for level 10.

• Par Address 33: Same for level 11.

• Par Address 34: Same for level 12.

• Par Address 35: Same for level 13.

• Par Address 36: Same for level 14.

• Par Address 37: Same for level 15.

Page 198: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 57

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 38 to 3F: best displayed in segment mode.

We will see later, at address 5B (programmed has 04), that we can program the Series 32driven hydraulic type.It could be that a new kind of hydraulic unit which functions differently appears and doesnot correspond 100% with the pre-programmed types.From addresses 38 to 3F, it is possible to define a particular function for a particularhydraulic unit.Each address to be defined corresponds to the STATE of the valves and contactor foreach stage of a movement.This sequence is the same whatever type of hydraulic, but the way in which to carry outeach stage differs depending on the unit (number of different types of valves, differentprocedures etc...).Each address, from 38 to 3F represents a stage and we assign the contactors and thevalves to an address which must be activated by it.We program the segment to " 1 " when we wish to activate a part in this stage.

EXAMPLE OF SPECIAL DEFINITION FOR HYDRAULIC SEQUENCE

Address V4 V3 V2 V1 L ∆ Y Stage

38 1 1 1 1 1 Up high speed L, Y

39 1 1 1

1 1 Up high speed L, ∆

3A 1 1

1 1 Up slow speed L, Y

3B 1 1 1 1 Up slow speed L, ∆

3C 1

1 1 Complete stop, up

3D 1 1 1

1 1 1 Down, high speed, L

3E 1 1

1 1 1 Down, low speed, L

3F 1 1 1 1 Complete stop, down L

Segment Seg 7 Seg 6 Seg 5 Seg 4

Seg 3 Seg 2 Seg 1 Seg 0

Valv

e

Valv

e fo

rhi

gh s

peed

Valv

e fo

rsl

ow s

peed

Up

dire

ctio

n

Dow

ndi

rect

ion

Page 199: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 58

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 7: V4 (Valve 4).

Programming segment 7 to " 1 " activates valve N° 4 at this stage.Programming segment 7 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 6: V3 (Valve 3).

Programming segment 6 to " 1 " activates valve N° 3 at this stage.Programming segment 6 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 5: V2 (Valve 2).

Programming segment 5 to " 1 " activates valve N° 2 at this stage.Programming segment 5 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 4: V1 (Valve 1).

Programming segment 4 to " 1 " activates valve N° 4 at this stage.Programming segment 4 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 3: Not used.

Segment 2: LINE (Line Contactor).

Programming segment 2 to " 1 " activates the line contactor at this stage.Programming segment 2 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 1: DELTA (Delta Contactor).

Programming segment 1 to " 1 " activates the delta contactor at this stage.Programming segment 1 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

Segment 0: STAR (Star Contactor).

Programming segment 0 to " 1 " activates the STAR contactor at this stage.Programming segment 0 to " 0 "results in the reverse case.

• Par Address 39: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 3A: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 3B: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

Page 200: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 59

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 3C: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 3D: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 3E: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 3F: best displayed in segment mode.

Same address 38 for stage:

• Par Address 40: best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we program the mechanical characteristics of DOOR 1 which the Series32 will operate.

Segment 7: RGPT

Segment 6: VERSTF1 (Door Forced when Closed).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to give a close signal in the case where amovement is desired. A message is given stating that the closure limit switch of Door 1 isopen but that 8 from the safety chain has not been closed.If there is a mechanical problem, in spite of 8 from the safety chain remaining closed, theclosure relay will be activated when the door integrator time has run out.We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5: P1SFCOU (Door 1 without Opening).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we want to operate automatic door 1 without anopening limit (FCOU).

Segment 4: P1SFCFE (Door 1 without Closure Limit).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want to operate automatic door 1 without aclosing limit (FCFE).We program segment 4 to " 0 "when we want to operate an automatic door fitted with aclosing limit (FCFE).

Segment 3: PMAFCP1 (Door 1 Extended Close Time).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " to hold the door close signal an additional 300ms after theclosed limit has been reached.We program segment 3 to " 0 " when we want to stop the movement from when door 1reaches the close limit.

Page 201: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 60

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 2: MSTPMP1 (Door 1 Forced Closure when Moving).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to give a door close signal while the car ismoving.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1: AMPSEC1 (Door 1 Drift OK).

If we program this segment to " 1 " and door 1 does not have a close limit , the Series 32will provide a close signal until 8 is closed. If the door drifts open and 8 is open, the doorclose signal is NOT given again. Only if a call is made is the door close signal given.With this type of door, we always program the option Forced Door Closure when Moving.We program segment 1 to " 0 " when this option is not required.

Segment 0: MSTPRP1 (Permanent Door 1 Signal).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " to keep the door 1 open or close signal even if the open orclosed limit has been reached.We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 41: TPO1 (Door 1 Timing) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the timing of door 1 in seconds and hex.

We can program a value of 1 to 255 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 42: TREP1 (Door 1 Re-Open Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address we program the time the door stays open when a re-open signal has beengiven (COI or CS).

This time is programmed in seconds and hex (from 1 to 255 seconds).

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 43: NIVMHS (Floor Out of Service) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the floor where the car parks when we use the " out of service" function.

If we wish the car to stay where it is the moment we activate the function, program " 0 " tosegments 6 and 7.

If we wish the car to park door(s) open or closed, we do this by switching on segment 7 fordoor 1 and segment 6 for door 2.

Segment 2 at address 09 (MHSPF) will thus be switched off.

Page 202: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 61

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 44: TIRP1 (Re-Open Door 1 Delay) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the desired time delay between reversing the direction of thedoor movement when re-opening .This may be necessary if the inertia of the door is high.Time is adjustable between 00ms and 2.55 seconds at intervals of 0.01 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 45: TFR8 (Filtering of 8) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time allowed for contact bounce of the car gate switch(input 8).Time is adjustable between 00ms and 2.55 seconds. Values are entered at intervals of10ms.E.G.: If a time delay of 500ms is desired, this would correspond to 50 × 10 ms.Consulting page 94, we can see that this equals 32 in hex, so the value programmedwould be 32.

• Par Address 46: TVP1/2 (Maximum time between 8 and 10) best displayed in hex.

At this address, we program the maximum time allowed between inputs 8 and 10 when acall has been made.E.G.: Flush shaft ascent fitted with swing landing doors and a mobile retiring ramp.The safety chain circuit is such that when the lift does not move and all the doors are shut,8 will appear. Making a call, combined with the fact that 8 is present, activates the mobileretiring ramp. If all goes well, 10 will appear almost instantly. We will program a smallinterlock time of 3 seconds. If, by contrast, the interlock is not done, once the time haspassed, the retiring ramp is de-activated to avoid it remaining under tension - permanently!The timing is the same for doors 1 and 2.We can program a value from 0 to 255 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 47: TIGP01 (Door 1 Integrator Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the maximum time allowed for the door 1 integrator time inseconds and hex.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

If we program 00, there is no door integrator.

Page 203: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 62

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 48: best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we define the operation of door 1 for level 0.

Segment 7: RCAME (Retiring Ramp Delay).

If we program segment 7 and the " single car door " segment 4 to 1, there is a delay of 1.5seconds when arriving at the level before the retiring ramp is de-energised.This limits the risk of getting fingers trapped in the car door which will barely start itsopening movement, insofar as we do not know how to open swing door before 1.5seconds have elapsed.If we program segment 7 to " 1 " in the case of totally automatic doors the retiring ramp isde-energised 1 second before initiating the door opening on arriving at a level.This can be useful in the case of the totally automatic doors interlocked with a retiringramp. Indeed, problems of things getting stuck can occur if the doors are opened at thesame time as the de-energising of the retiring ramp.

Segment 6: Not used

Segment 5: Not used

Segment 4: (Car Door 1 at Level 0).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when a car is fitted with an automatic door commanded bythe Series 32 relays, the landing doors being of the swinging type.We program segment 4 to " 0 " when a flush shaft, an automatic car door driven by oneretiring ramp or an automatic car and hall door is used.

Segment 3: OUAVAP1N0 (Opening Door 1 Before Stop atLevel 0).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want the Series 32 to Open Door 1 BeforeStopping at Level 0.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: STP1OUN0 (Parking with Door 1 Open at level 0).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want the car to park with door 1 open at level 0.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1: SER1INO (Service 1 not allowed at Level 0).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we wish to prevent door 1 opening at level 0.We program segment 1 to " 0 " when we authorise the opening of door 1 at level 0.

Page 204: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 63

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 0: OUNSIMN0 (Non-Simultaneous Door Opening atLevel 0).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we wish to prevent the simultaneous opening ofdoors 1 and 2 at level 0 (Locking effect).We program segment 0 to " 0 " when we authorise the simultaneous opening of doors 1and 2 at level 0.This function can only be used with the double service selective.

• Par Address 49: best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we define the operation of door 1 for level 1.

• Par Address 4a: .. Same for level 02. • Par Address 51: .. Same for level 09.

• Par Address 4b: .. Same for level 03. • Par Address 52: .. Same for level 10.

• Par Address 4d: .. Same for level 05. • Par Address 54: .. Same for level 12.

• Par Address 4e: .. Same for level 06 • Par Address 55: .. Same for level 13.

• Par Address 4f: .. Same for level 07. • Par Address 56: .. Same for level 14.

• Par Address 50: .. Same for level 08. • Par Address 57: .. Same for level 15.

• Par Address 58: TDEMYD (Start-up time Star Delta) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time during which we want the STAR contactor to be on.We can program a time from 0 to 25.5 seconds at intervals of 0.1 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 59: TARMVT (Movement Stop Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time during which the ascent Slow Speed distance valvecontinues to be fed after the stopping point.We can program a time from 0 to 2.55 seconds at intervals of 0.01 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 5A: TPMPVM (Movement Extension time for the Ascent Slow SpeedDistance) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the extra time we need to feed the motor.We can program a time from 0 to 2.55 seconds at intervals of 0.01 seconds.See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

Page 205: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 64

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 5B: TYPHYD (Hydraulic Type) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the type of hydraulic that the Series 32 will drive.See in the list below the number which has been attributed to the main types of hydraulicscurrently known:

0 = GMV-MARTINI 3 Valves.0 = MORRIS.0 = OMAR.1 = HAMMOND-CHAMPNESS.1 = ALGI.2 = DOVER.3 = BERINGER ELECTRONIQUE.4 = Can be defined in addresses 38 to 3F.

• Par Address 5C: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: RAMDES (Down Collective).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to carry out the Down Collective.We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5: BASE 8N (Base 8 Level).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we want to set up a single automatic operation or a 1button collective up and down. All this up to level 8 just by using using the BG15 (withoutaddition of the BG18).We program 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 4: Not used.

Segment 3: DNH (Oil Level Fault).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to operate the Oil Level Fault Contact.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: Not used.

Segment 1: DEMDIR (Direct Start-Up).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to carry out a direct start-up.We program segment 1 to " 0 " when we want to carry out a Star-Delta start-up.

Page 206: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 65

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 0: TAQUET (Pawl).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to operate the pawls.We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 5D: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: DPLX (Multiplex).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " if we want to use a multiplex interconnected group.We program segment 6 to " 0 " if we want the Series 32 to work in simplex.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: Not used.

Segment 3: NIVSIN (Levels Damaged by Fire).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " if we want to control Levels Damaged by Fire.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: DSERVS (Double Selective Service).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " if we want to operate 2 Service Selective.

We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1: Not used.

Segment 0: Not used.

• Par Address 5E: TRAUN0 (Automatic Homing Time to Level 0) best displayed inhexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time that runs between the moment when the apparatus isbeing called and its automatic homing to level 0.We can program a time from 1 to 15 minutes at intervals of 1 minute.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

By programming 00, this function will not be used.

Page 207: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 66

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 5F: TRAUN0 best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: STPREG (thermostat Regulation).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " if we want to operate a thermostat for the SLOW SPEEDDISTANCE IN RELATION TO THE OIL TEMPERATURE IN THE HYDRAULIC UNITfunction.See the parameters to addresses 5F, segment 1, C0 TO C7 AND C8 TO CF.We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3: DCTQET (Doubling the Pawl Control Speed).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to double the time allowed for the pawlcontrol.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: Not used.

Segment 1: REGDRAL (Slow Speed Distance Regulation).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " if we want to operate the SLOW SPEED INRELATION TO THE OIL TEMPERATURE IN THE HYDRAULIC UNIT function.

See the parameters to addresses 5F, segment 4, C0 to C7 and C8 to CF.We program segment 0 to " 1 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0: Not used.

• Par Address 60: best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we set out the desired mechanical characteristics of DOOR 2:The relays which drive door 2 are those mounted outside the door.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: VERSTF2 (Door Forced when Closed).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to provide a door close signal even if theclosed limit has been reached, but 8 has not yet been closed.If a mechanical problem means that in spite of everything 8 from the safety chain is notclosed, the closure relay will drop when the door integrator time has elapsed.We program 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 208: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 67

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 5: P2SFCOU (Door 2 without Open Limit).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we wish to operate Door 2 in the open directionwithout looking for a door open limit (FCOU).We program segment 5 to " 0 " when we want to operate an automatic door equipped witha close limit switch (FCOU).

Segment 4: P2SFCFE (Door 2 without Closed Limit).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want to operate Door 2 in the close directionwithout looking for a door close limit (FCFE).We program segment 4 to " 0 " when we want to operate an automatic door equipped witha closure limit switch (FCFE).

Segment 3: PMAFCP2 (Door 2 Extended Close Time).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to maintain movement for an additional 300ms after the closed limit has been reached.We program segment 3 to " 0 " when we want to stop the movement from when door 2 hasreached the closed limit.

Segment 2: MSTPMP2 (Keep Power On whilst Door 2 inOperation).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to keep door 2 motor on during operation.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1: AMPSEC2 (Stopping of Door 2 Movement on arrivalof Safety Chain).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to operate a door without having reachedthe closed limit and which has a tendency to re-open when the motor is no longer fed.Having lost 8 from the safety chain, we once more give a close signal to re-gain 8. Thedoor will continue to bang if this option is not programmed. Indeed, the motor ceases to befed the first time 8 appears.With this type of door, we always program the Closing Forced when Moving option.We program 0 to " 0 " when this option is not required.

Segment 0: MSTPRP2 (Keep Door 2 Power Permanently On).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to keep the door 2 motor operatorpermanently on when opening and closing.We program segment 0 to " 1 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 61: TP02 (Timing of Door N° 2) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the timing of door 2 in seconds and hex.We can program a value from 2 to 255 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

Page 209: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 68

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 62: TREP2 (Re-Opening Time of Door 2) best displayed inhexadecimal.

At this address, we program the time during which door 2 stays open after having causeda RE-OPENING.This timing is programmed into seconds and hex.Its value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 63: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: CABVID (Empty Car Option).

We program segment 7 to " 1 " when we want the A191 to operate the EMPTY CARoption.This option consists of erasing all the requests for the car if after 3 stops the light cell hasnot been broken.We program segment 7 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 6: SHTCS (CS Nudging Option).

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want the A191 to nudge the CS option afterthe time programmed into address 62 has elapsed and if a request has been

registered. Furthermore, we activate output " INH1 " which feeds a buzzer to informpassengers that the door will be re-closing.

(See output position - parameter address 7A, segments 4 to 7 on page 88).We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5: ISO (Re-Levelling).

We program segment 5 to " 1 " if we want the RE-LEVELLING option (open AND closeddoors).We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 4: RMLIFT (MLift Regulator).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " if we want to drive an MLift variable frequency speedregulatorWe program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3: Not used.

Segment 2: REGUL (REGULator).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to drive an independent speed regulator.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 210: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 69

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 1: OUAVAR (Open Before Stop).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " if we want to carry out the Open Before Stop function andthus operate the safety chain N66 nudging device.We program segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0: TPRAL (Door Lengthening Time).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " if we want the base unit of the door timings to go from 1 to2.5 seconds, thus allowing us to have times from 5 seconds to 10 minutes.We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 64: TIRP2 (Reversal Time of the Door 2 Relays) best displayed in hex.

At this address, we program the time which runs from the instant the Serie 32 releases theclosure relay to when it activates the door 2 open relay .

This timing is programmed at intervals of between 10 ms and 2.55 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

• Par Address 67: TIGPO2 (Door 2 Integrator Time) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, we program the timing of the door 2 integrator in seconds and in hex.We can program a value from 1 to 255 seconds.

See page 94 for the conversion between decimal and hex, from 0 to 255 ....... 00 to FF.

If we program 00, there will be no Door Integrator.

• Par Address 68: TIGPO2 best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we define the door 2 functioning for level 0.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: PORCAB2N0 (Car Door 2 at Level 0).

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when a car equipped with an automatic door commandedby the Series 32 relays (the landing doors are of the swing variety).

We program segment 4 to " 0 " with a flush shaft or with an automatic car driven by just 1retiring ramp or with an automatic car and landing.

Page 211: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 70

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Segment 3: OUAVAP2N0 (Open Before Stop of Door 2 atLevel 0).

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to carry out an opening before stop of door2 at level 0.We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2: STPOU0 (Parking Door 2 Open at Level 0).

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to park the car with door 2 open at level 0.We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1: SER2IN0 (Service 2 Not Allowed at Level 0).

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when the opening of door 2 at level 0 is not allowed.We program segment 1 to " 0 " when we allow the opening of door 2 at level 0.

Segment 0: OUNSIM0 (Non Simultaneous Opening at Level 0).

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when the simultaneous opening of doors 1 and 2 at level 0is not allowed (locking effect).We program segment 0 to " 0 " when we allow the simultaneous opening of doors 1 and 2at level 0.This function can only be used in the double service selective.

• Par Address 69: best displayed in segment mode.

At this address, we define the functioning of door 2 for level 1.

• Par Address 6a: ..... same for level 02.

• Par Address 6b: ..... same for level 03.

• Par Address 6c: ..... same for level 04.

• Par Address 6d: ..... same for level 05.

• Par Address 6e: ..... same for level 06.

• Par Address 6f: ..... same for level 07.

• Par Address 70: ..... same for level 08.

• Par Address 71: ..... same for level 09.

• Par Address 72: ..... same for level 10.

• Par Address 73: ..... same for level 11.

• Par Address 74: ..... same for level 12.

• Par Address 75: ..... same for level 13.

• Par Address 76: ..... same for level 14.

• Par Address 77: ..... same for level 15.

Page 212: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 71

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 78: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7:

We program segment 7 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 4 (SPG4) forthe overload buzzer (RF).We program segment 7 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 6:

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 3 (SPG3)for the overload buzzer (RF).We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5:

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 2 (SPG2) forthe overload buzzer (RF).We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 4:

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 1 (SPG1) forthe overload buzzer (RF).We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3:

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 4 (SPG4) forthe OVERLOAD LIGHT (VSU).We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2:

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 3 (SPG3) forthe overload light (VSU).We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1:

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 2 (SPG2) forthe overload light (VSU).We program segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0:

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 1 (SPG1) forthe overload light (VSU).We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 213: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 72

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 79: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7:

We program segment 7 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 4 (SPG4) forthe Out of Service light (VHS).We program segment 7 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 6:

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 3 (SPG3) forthe Out of Service light (VHS).We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5:

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 2 (SPG2) forthe Out of Service light (VHS).We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 4:

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want to use programmable output 1 (SPG1) forthe Out of Service Light (VHS).We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3:

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 4 (SPG4)for the GONG (GONG).We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2:

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 3 (SPG3)for the GONG (GONG).We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1:

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 2 (SPG2)for the GONG (GONG).We program segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0:

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 1 (SPG1)for the GONG (GONG).We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 214: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 73

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 7A: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7:

We program segment 7 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 4 (SPG4)to inhibit (INH1).(See parameter address 63, segments 4 to 7).We program segment 7 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 6:

We program segment 6 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 3 (SPG3)to INHIBIT (INH1).(See parameter address 63, segments 4 to 7).We program segment 6 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 5:

We program segment 5 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 2 (SPG2)to INHIBIT (INH1).(See parameter address 63, segments 4 to 7).We program segment 5 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 4:

We program segment 4 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 1 (SPG1)to INHIBIT (INH1).(See parameter address 63, segments 4 to 7).We program segment 4 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 3:

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 4 (SPG4)for the fire service light (VPMP).We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2:

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 3 (SPG3)for the fire service light (VPMP).We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1:

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 2 (SPG2)for the fire service light (VPMP).We program segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0:

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 1 (SPG1)for the fire service light (VPMP).We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Page 215: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 74

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address 7B: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: Not used.

Segment 3:

We program segment 3 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 4 (SPG4)for the AUTOMATIC LIGHT (LU).We program segment 3 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 2:

We program segment 2 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 3 (SPG3)for the AUTOMATIC LIGHT (LU).We program segment 2 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 1:

We program segment 1 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 2 (SPG2)for the AUTOMATIC LIGHT (LU).We program segment 1 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

Segment 0:

We program segment 0 to " 1 " when we want to use the programmable output 1 (SPG1)for the AUTOMATIC LIGHT (LU).We program segment 0 to " 0 " in the reverse case.

• Par Address 7E: CAADDEF (Last But One Fault Code) best displayed inhexadecimal.

At this address, the Series 32 gives the fault code 3.

• Par Address 7F: CDEFPA (Oldest Fault Code) best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, the Series 32 gives the fault code 4.

Page 216: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 75

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address CO: Temperature up to which the distance C8 is chosen, best displayedin hexadecimal.

At this address, in the context of the SLOW SPEED DISTANCE VARIATION OF THE OILTEMPERATURE IN THE HYDRAULIC UNIT function, we program the temperature towhich we will use the slow speed distance programmed into address C8 (in %).

• Par Address C1: Temperature up to which the distance C9 is chosen, best displayed inhexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address C9 (in %).

• Par Address C2: Temperature up to which the distance CA is chosen, best displayedin hexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CA (in %).

• Par Address C3: Temperature up to which the distance CB is chosen, best displayedin hexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CB (in %).

• Par Address C4: Temperature up to which the distance CC is chosen, best displayedin hexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CC (in %).

• Par Address C5: Temperature up to which the distance CD is chosen, best displayedin hexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CD (in %).

• Par Address C6: Temperature up to which the distance CE is chosen, best displayed inhexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CE (in %).

• Par Address C7: Temperature up to which the distance CF is chosen, best displayed inhexadecimal.

We program the temperature up to which we will use the slow speed distanceprogrammed into address CF (in %).

Page 217: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 76

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

• Par Address C8: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C0, best displayed in hexadecimal.

At this address, in the context of THE SLOW SPEED DISTANCE VARIATION OF THEOIL TEMPERATURE IN THE HYDRAULIC UNIT function, we program the slow speeddistance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmed into C0.

• Par Address C9: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C1, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C1.

• Par Address CA: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C2, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C2.

• Par Address CB: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C3, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C3.

• Par Address CC: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C4, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C4.

• Par Address CD: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C5, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C5.

• Par Address CE: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C6, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C6.

• Par Address CF: Slow speed distance chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C7, best displayed in hexadecimal.

We program the slow speed distance (in %) chosen up to the temperature programmedinto C7.

Page 218: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 77

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

In order to make the inputs visible, we must put the little switch on the left up in the" RAM " position.

• Ram Address 00: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: C0 - 7 (Car Calls 0 to 7).

They indicate to us respectively the state of the car call contacts C0 to C7 with thecommon COMB button.The corresponding segments are on when contacts are closed to make a call.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 01: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: C8 - 15 (Car Calls 8 to 15).

They show us respectively the state of the car calls contacts C8 to C15 with the commonCOMB button.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to make a call.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 03: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: MO - 7 (Landing Calls for Up, 0 to 7).

They show us respectively the state of the contacts of the landing calls for UP. M0 to M7with the common COMB button.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to make a call.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 04: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: M8 - 15 (Landing Calls for Up, 8 to 15).

They show us respectively the state of the contacts of the landing calls for UP. M8 to M15with the common COMB button.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to make a call.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

Page 219: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 78

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 06: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 1 to 7: D1 - 7 (Landing Calls for Down, 1 to 7).

They show us respectively the state of the contacts of the landing call for Down D1 to D7with the common COMB button.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to make a call.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: M0 (Landing Calls for Up, 0).

• Ram Address 09: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: NF0 - 7 (Levels Damaged by Fire, 0 to 7).

They show us respectively the state of the levels damaged by fire contacts NF7 to NF0with 0V.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to indicate levelsdamaged by fire and thus not to serve them.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 0A: best displayed in segment mode.

Segments 0 to 7: NF8 - 15 (Levels Damaged by Fire, 8 to 15).

They show us respectively the state of the levels damaged by fire contacts NF7 to NF0with 0V.The corresponding segments are on when the contacts are closed to indicate the levelsdamaged by fire and thus not to serve them.The corresponding segments are off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 0C: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: SU (Overload)

This shows us the state of the overload contact (SU and 0V).Segment 7 is on when the contact is closed, i.e., in overload.Segment 7 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 6: Not used

Segment 5: ED (Extreme Down Contact).

This shows us the state of the Extreme Down contact (ED and 0V).Segment 5 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., when the car is not on ED.Segment 5 is on when the car is on ED.

Page 220: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 79

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

Segment 4: MAN (Emergency Operation).

This shows us the state of the contact which switches to emergency operation (MAN and0V).Segment 4 is off when the contact is closed, i.e.; normal.Segment 4 is on when the contact is open, i.e., when in emergency operation.

Segment 3: INS (Inspection).

This shows us the state of the contact which switches to inspection (INS and 0V).Segment 3 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., normal.Segment 3 is on when the contact is open, i.e., when being inspected.

Segment 2: GM (Up).

This shows us the state of the request movement contact in Up (GM and 0V).Segment 2 is on when the contact is closed for an upward travel request. (GM and 0V).Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: GD (Down).

This shows us the state of the movement request contact in Down (GD and 0V).Segment 1 is on when the contact is closed for a downward travel request.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: MASS (MASS Relay).

This shows us the state of the MASS relay.Segment 0 is on if there is a mass fault.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 0D: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used

Segment 6: Not used

Segment 5: PH (Phase Failure Input).

This shows us the state of the Phase Failure Input (PH and 0V).Segment 5 is on when there is no phase.Segment 5 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 4: THV (Fan thermistor) TRACTION.

This shows us the state of the Fan thermistor (THV and OV).Segment 4 is on when the contact is closed in case of a fault.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Page 221: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 80

INPUTS DEFINITIONSSegment 4: DNH (Oil Level Fault) HYDRAULIC.

This shows us the state of the contact detecting the minimum oil level rendering furthertravel dangerous for the equipment.Segment 4 is on when the contact is closed in the case of a fault.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: RP (Low Velocity Contactor Control) TRACTION.

This shows us the state of the low velocity contactor control (PV).Segment 3 is on when the PV contactor is on.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: NHM (Minimum Oil Level) HYDRAULIC.

This shows us the state of the contact detecting the minimum oil level which is no longerdangerous for the equipment, but which still needs a little oil.Segment 3 is on when the contact is closed due to a lack of oil.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 2: RG (High Velocity Contactor Control) TRACTION.

This shows us the state of the high velocity contactor control (GV).Segment 2 is on when the GV contactor is on.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 2: RL (Ligne Contactor Control) HYDRAULIC.

This shows us the state of the path contactor (L).Segment 2 is on when the contactor is on.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: RM (Up Contactor Control) TRACTION.

This shows us the state of the up contactor (MO).Segment 1 is on when contactor MO is on.Segment 1 is put off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: RY (Star Contactor Control) HYDRAULIC.

This shows us the state of the star contactor (Y).Segment 1 is lit when contactor Y is on.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: RD (Down Contactor Control) TRACTION.

This shows us the state of the down contactor (DE).Segment 0 is lit when contactor DE is on.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: R∆ (Delta Contactor Control) HYDRAULIC.

This shows us the state of the Delta contactor (∆).Segment 0 is on when the ∆ contactor is on.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Page 222: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 81

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 0E: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: ZONE (Door Zone Relay).

This shows us whether the shunting device DONNE the door zone or not.Segment 6 is on if the device is in the zone.Segment 6 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: PRIC (Car Priority).

This shows us the state of the car priority contact. (PRIC and 0V).Segment 4 is on when the contact is closed to command the car priority function.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: NS (Non-Stop).

This shows us the state of the Non-stop contact (NS and 0V).Segment 3 is on when the contact is closed to command the Non-Stop function.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 2: SUSD (Delayed Departure).

This shows us the state of the delayed departure contact (SUSD and 0V).Segment 2 is on when the contact is closed to command the delayed departure.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: MHS (Out of Service).

This shows us the state of the Out of Service contact (MHS and 0V).Segment 1 is on when the contact is closed to command the Switch to out of Servicefunction.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: POM (Fireman Service).

This shows us the state of the Fireman Service contact (POM and 0V).Segment 0 is on when the contact is closed, i.e., when the Fireman Service function iscommanded.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Page 223: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 82

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 0F: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: FF1 (Front Door Close Button).

This shows us the state of the Front Door Close Button.Segment 4 is on when the contact is closed for a command to force the door closed.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: COI1 (Front Door Safety Knuckle Input).

This shows us the Front Door Safety Knuckle Input (COI1 and 0V).Segment 3 is on when the contact is closed.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 2: CS1 (Front Door Photocell Input).

This shows us the state of the Front Door Photocell Input (CS1 and 0V).Segment 2 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., when the photocell is unbroken.Segment 2 is on when the photocell detects something.

Segment 1: FCFE1 (Front Door Close End Limit).

This shows us the Front Door Close End Limit (FCFE1 and 0V).The segment 1 is off when the Front Door Close End Limit is closed, i.e., when Door 1 isnot completely closed.The segment 1 is on when the Front Door Close End Limit is open, i.e., when Door 1 iscompletely closed.

Segment 0: FCOU1 (Front Door Open End Limit).

This shows us the state of the Front Door Open End Limit (FCOU1 and 0V).Segment 0 is off when the Front Door Open End Limit is closed, i.e., when the door 1 isnot completely opened.Segment 0 is on when the Front Door Open End Limit is open, i.e., when Door 1 iscompletely opened.

Page 224: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 83

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 10: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: FF2 (Rear Door Close Button).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Close Button (FF2 et 0V).Segment 4 is on when the contact is closed for a forced closure command..Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: COI2 (Rear Door Safety Knuckle Input).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Safety Knuckle Input (CO12 and 0V).Segment 3 is on when the contact is closed.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 2: CS2 (Rear Door Photocell Input).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Photocell Input (CS2 and 0V).Segment 2 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., when the photocell is unbroken.Segment 2 is on when the photocell detects something.

Segment 1: FCFE2 (Rear Door Close End Limit).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Close End Limit (FCFE2).Segment 1 is off when the Rear Door Close End Limit is closed, i.e., when the door is notcompletely shut.Segment 1 is on when the Rear Door Close End Limit is open, i.e., when the door iscompletely closed.

Segment 0: FCOU2 (Rear Door Open End Limit).

This shows us the state of Rear Door Open End Limit (FCOU2).Segment 0 is off when the Rear Door Open End Limit is closed, i.e., when the door is notcompletely open.Segment 0 is on when the Rear Door Open End Limit is open, i.e., when the door iscompletely open.

Page 225: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 84

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 11: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: Not used.

Segment 3: EXD (Extreme Down Contact).

This shows us the state of the Extreme Down Contact.Segment 3 is on when the contact is open, i.e., when the car is below the bottom EDmagnet ED.Segment 3 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., when the car is above the bottom EDmagnet ED.

Segment 2: EXM (Extreme Up Contact).

This shows us the state of the Extreme Up Contact.Segment 2 is on when the contact is open, i.e., when the car is above the top EM magnet.Segment 2 is off when the contact is closed, i.e., when the car is below the top EMmagnet.

Segment 1: CAB (Tape head, Harness B).

This shows us the state of Harness B.Segment 1 is on when harness B is open.Segment 1 is off when harness B is closed.

Segment 0: CAA (Tape head, Harness A).

This shows us the state of Harness A.Segment 0 is on when harness A is open.Segment 0 is off when harness A is closed.

Page 226: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 85

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 12: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: MTH (Oil Temperature Measure).

Segment 4 is on when the MTH 0V contact is open or when the temperature probe hasreached a certain value.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: STH (Thermic Probe).

This shows us the state of the thermostat (STH and 0V).Segment 3 is off when the contact is closed in normal operating mode.Segment 3 is on in the reverse case.

Segment 2: 10 (Level 10 of the Safety Lane).

This shows us the state of the safety lanes at level 10 of the safety lane.Segment 2 is on when the safety lane connection is closed up to level 10.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: 8 (Level 8 of the Safety Lane).

This shows us the state of the safety lanes at level 8 of the safety lane.Segment 1 is on when the safety lane connection is closed up to level 8.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: 6 (Level 6 of the Safety Lane).

This shows us the state of the safety lanes at level 8 of the safety lane.Segment 0 is on when the safety lane connection is closed up to level 6.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Page 227: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 86

INPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 62: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: Not used.

Segment 6: Not used.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: Not used.

Segment 3: Not used.

Segment 2: IGV (Fast Speed Inspection).

This shows us the state of the Fast Speed Inspection contact.Segment 2 is on when the contact is closed to request the Fast Speed Inspection.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: TACQ2 (Anti-creep 2).

This shows the state of Anti-creep 2.Segment 1 is on if the contact is closed when Anti-creep 2 has drawn back in.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: TACQ1 (Anti-creep 1).

This shows us the state of Anti-creep 1.Segment 0 is on if the contact is closed when Anti-creep 1 had drawn back in.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Page 228: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 87

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

In order to make the outputs visible, we must put the little switch on the left up in the" RAM " position.

NOTE CONCERNING THE OUTPUTS:Certain Outputs are ELECTRONIC and can only give out 50 mA under 24V (1.2W

max). We will indicate this by putting (S ELEC) with their definition.Certain Outputs are DRY relay CONTACTS whose common connection is

accessible. We will indicate this by putting (S CONT) with their definition.Certain Outputs are DRY relay CONTACTS whose common connection is not

accessible because it is already linked internally to the 24R potential. We will indicate thisby putting (S CONT 24R) with their definition.

It is suitable therefore to interface the outputs in accordance with the component tocommand.

• Ram Address 13: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: CREP (Common Position Repeater) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Common Position Repeater (CREP).If segment 7 blinks, the CREP is " ALIVE".If segment 7 is off or remains on, the CREP is "DEAD".

Segment 6: LU (Automatic Car Light) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Automatic Car Light (LU).Segment 6 is on when the LU output is activated and gives out 0 Volt.Segment 6 is off when the LU output is de-activated and gives out 24 Volts.

Segment 5: FE1 (Front Door Close Signal Output) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Front Door Close Signal Output (FE1).Segment 5 is on if the Front Door Close Signal Output is fed.Segment 5 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 4: OU1 (Front Door Open Signal Output) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Front Door Open Signal Output (OU1).Segment 4 is on if the Front Door Open Signal Output is fed.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: CAM (Retiring Ramp).

This shows us the state of the Retiring Ramp output (CAM).Segment 3 is on if the Retiring Ramp output is activated.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Page 229: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 88

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

Segment 2: GV/PV (Fast Speed / Slow Speed relay) (S CONT), or V2 (for Freq.Drive).

This shows us the state of the Fast Speed / Slow Speed Relay (GV / GP).Segment 2 is on if relay GV / PV is supplied to command contactor GV.Segment 2 is off if the relay GV / PV is not supplied to command contactor PV.

Segment 1: DE (Down Relay) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Down Relay (DE).Segment 1 is on if the DE relay is fed.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: MO (Up Relay) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Up Relay (MO).Segment 0 is on if the MO relay is fed.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 14: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: V1 (Speed 1) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of Speed 1 output.Segment 7 is on if Speed 1 output is activated.Segment 7 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 6: V0 (Speed 0) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Speed 0 output.Segment 6 is on if Speed 0 output is activated.Segment 6 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 5: Not used.

Segment 4: SH8 (Bridge 8) (S ELEC).

This gives us the state of the SH8 output.Segment 4 is on when SH8 output is activated and gives 0 V.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: INH2 (Rear Door Inhibition) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the INH2 output which is activated when the anti-skatingintegrator is dropped.Segment 3 is on when INH2 output is activated and gives 0 V.Segment 3 is off in the reverse case.

Page 230: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 89

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

Segment 2: INH1 (Front Door Inhibition) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of INH1 output which depends on the option SHTCS (CS Bridge)address 63 segment 6.Segment 2 is on when INH1 output is activated and gives 0 V.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 1: FE2 (Rear Door Close Signal Output) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Close Signal Output (FE2).Segment 1 is on if the Rear Door Close Signal Output is fed.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: OU2 (Rear Door Open Signal Output) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Rear Door Open Signal Output (OU2).Segment 0 is on if the Rear Door Open Signal Output is fed.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

• Ram Address 15: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: DEF (Fault Light) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Fault Light Output. (DEF).Segment 7 is on when the Fault Output is activated and gives out 0 V.Segment 7 is off when the Fault Output is de-activated and gives out 24V.

Segment 6: GONG (GONG) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the GONG Output (GONG).Segment 6 is on when the Gong Output is activated and gives out 24 Volts.Segment 6 is off when the Gong Output is de-activated and gives out 0 Volts.

Segment 5: FD (Down Arrow) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Down Arrow (FD).Segment 5 is on when the FD Output is activated and gives out 24 Volts.Segment 5 is off when the FD Output is de-activated and gives out 0 Volts.

Segment 4: FM (Up Arrow) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Up Arrow (FM).Segment 4 is on when the FM Output is activated and gives out 24 Volts.Segment 4 is off when the FM Output is de-activated and gives out 0 Volts.

Page 231: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 90

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

Segment 3: VSU (Overload Light) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Overload Light Output (VSU).Segment 3 is on when the VSU Output is activated and gives out 0 Volts.Segment 3 is off when the VSU Output is de-activated and gives out 24 Volts.

Segment 2: RF (Buzzer) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Overload Buzzer (RF).Segment 2 is on when the RF Output is activated and gives out 0 Volts.Segment 2 is off when the RF Output is de-activated and gives out 24 Volts.

Segment 1: VHS (Out of Service Light) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Out of Service Light Output. (VHS).

Segment 1 is on when the VHS Output is activated and gives out 0 Volts.Segment 1 is off when the VHS Output is de-activated and gives out 24 Volts.

Segment 0: VPMP (Fireman Service Light) (S ELEC).

This shows us the state of the Fireman Light Output (VPMP).Segment 0 is on when the VPMP Output is activated and gives out 0 Volts.Segment 0 is off when the VPMP Output is de-activated and gives out 24 Volts.

• Ram Address 16: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: QC0-7 (Car Registration Lights 0 - 7) (S ELEC).

These show us respectively the state of the Car Registration Lights QC0 to QC7.Outputs QC0 to QC7 are the terminals C0 to C7.The corresponding segments are on when the Outputs are activated and give out 0 Volts.The corresponding segments are off when the Outputs are de-activated and give out 24Volts.

• Ram Address 17: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: QC8-15 (Car Registration Lights 8 - 15) (SELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Car Registration Lights QC8 to QC15.Outputs QC8 to QC15 are the terminals C8 to C15.

Page 232: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 91

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address 19: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: QM0-7 (Hall Call Registration Lights for Up 0to 7) (S ELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Hall Call Registration Lights for Up, QM0 toQM7.Outputs QM0 to QM7 are the terminals MX to M7.The corresponding segments are on when the Outputs are activated and give out 0 Volts.The corresponding segments are off when the Outputs are de-activated and give out 24Volts.

• Ram Address 1A: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: QM8-15 (Hall Call Registration Lights for Up 8to 15) (S ELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Hall Call Registration Lights for Up, QM8 toQM15.Outputs QM8 to QM15 are the terminals M8 to M15.

• Ram Address 1C: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 1 to 7: QD1-7 (Hall Call Registration Lights for Down 1to 7) (S ELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Hall Call Registration Lights for Down, QD1 toQD7.Outputs QD1 to QD7 are the terminals D1 to D7.The corresponding segments are on when the Outputs are activated and give 0 Volts.The corresponding segments are off when the Outputs are de-activated and give 24 Volts.

Segment 0: Not used

• Ram Address 1D: best displayed in segment mode (S ELEC).

Segment 0 to 7: QD8-15 (for Down 8 to 15).

They show us respectively the state of the Hall Call Registration Lights for down QD8 toQD15.Outputs QD8 to QD15 are the terminals D8 to D15.

Page 233: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 92

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

• Ram Address IF: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: POS0-7 (Positioning 0 to 7) (S ELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Positioning Outputs POS0 to POS7.The corresponding segments are on when the Outputs are activated and give out 0 Volts.The corresponding segments are off when the Outputs are de-activated and give out 24Volts.

• Ram Address 20: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 0 to 7: POS8-15 (Positioning 8 to 15) (S ELEC).

They show us respectively the state of the Positioning Outputs POS8 to POS15.

• Ram Address 61: best displayed in segment mode.

Segment 7: V4 (Valve 4) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of Valve Relay 4.Segment 7 is on when Valve Relay 4 is fed in order to drive Valve 4.Segment 7 is out in the reverse case.

Segment 6: V3 (Valve 3) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of Valve Relay 3.Segment 6 is on when Valve Relay 3 is fed in order to drive Valve 3.Segment 6 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 5: V2 (Valve 2) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of Valve Relay 2.Segment 5 is on when the Valve Relay 2 is fed in order to drive Valve 2.Segment 5 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 4: V1 (Valve 1) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of Valve Relay 1.Segment 4 is on when Valve Relay 1 is fed in order to drive Valve 1.Segment 4 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 3: Not used

Segment 2: L (Line Relay) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Line Relay (L).Segment 2 is on if Relay L is fed.Segment 2 is off in the reverse case.

Page 234: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 93

OUTPUTS DEFINITIONS

Segment 1: ∆ (Delta Relay) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Delta Relay.Segment 1 is on when the Delta Relay is fed.Segment 1 is off in the reverse case.

Segment 0: Y (Star Relay) (S CONT).

This shows us the state of the Star Relay.Segment 0 is on if the Star Relay is fed.Segment 0 is off in the reverse case.

Page 235: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 94

CONVERSION TABLE HEXADECIMAL ⇔ DECIMAL

Using the table:

Right hand figure0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 151 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 312 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 473 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 634 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 795 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95

Left 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111hand 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127figure 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159A 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175B 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191C 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207D 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223E 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239F 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

To convert a hexadecimal number to a decimal number, find the left hand hexadecimal digit inthe left hand column of the table. Follow along the line until it intersects with the right hand digitto be found in the top row of the table. This value is the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimalnumber required.Example: to convert the hexadecimal number A4 into decimal, follow the row A in the left handcolumn until it intersects with the column 4 in the top row. This is the decimal equivalent of A4,i.e. 164.To convert a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, find the decimal number in the table.The first figure of the hexadecimal number is the digit shown in the left hand column of that line,and the second digit is the digit shown at the top of that column.Example: to find the hexadecimal equivalent of 206, find that value in the table. The hexadecimalequivalent is CE.

Page 236: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 95

CONTROLLER PARAMETERS TABLE (1/2)Add Seg. 7 Seg. 6 Seg. 5 Seg. 4 Seg. 3 Seg. 2 Seg. 1 Seg. 000 CLF - CODE FOR LAST FAULT01 CFBL - CODE OF FAULT BEFORE LAST02 REGUL DPLX ISO RMLIFT NIVSIN DSERVS OUAVAR FACTORY03 NBDOR - NUMBER OF DOOR OPERATORS04 TOPLEV - TOP LEVEL05 BOTLEV -BOTTOM LEVEL06 LOBBY - MAIN FLOOR07 SAPB CONFAL NODOOR MAN INS SPL INS CALSLZ EDOP DRODD

08 2S/RECAV1

LCF DIF ALLAN CALCAN GFD RLVDC RLVDO

09 GONGLEV DORFALT FSINS NOFSDI FIRESV OSDC FIRETYP0A TIG - INTEGRATOR’S DURATION (2 TO 45 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])0B TPV - SLOW SPEED DURATION (3 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])0C TPLU - AUTOMATIC LIGHT DURATION (2 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])0D TINS - INSPECTION DURATION (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])0E TCAPGV - TAPE HEAD FAST SPEED TIME (2 TO 25,5 SECONDS [IN 1/10 SECONDS])0F TCAPPV - TAPE HEAD SLOW SPEED TIME (3 TO 25,5 SECONDS [IN 1/10 SECONDS])10 MSQCAB - MASK FOR CAR CALLS FROM 7 TO 011 MSQCAB - MASK FOR CAR CALLS FROM 15 TO 81213 MSQMO - MASK FOR ASCENDING FLOOR CALLS FOR LEVEL FROM 7 TO 114 MSQMO - MASK FOR ASCENDING FLOOR CALLS FOR LEVEL FROM 15 TO 81516 MSQDE - MASK FOR DECENDING FLOOR CALLS FOR LEVEL FROM 7 TO 017 MSQDE - MASK FOR DECENDING FLOOR CALLS FOR LEVEL FROM 15 TO 81819 TPISO - RELEVELLING TIMING (2 TO 10 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])

(with slotted tape)PVCRH

(with vanes)PVCRB

(with vanes)1A Not used CROSSED VANES FOR SHORT INTERFLOOR 7-8 / 0-1 Only1B with slotted tape CROSSED VANES FOR SHORT INTERFLOOR 15-16 / 8-9 with vanes1C1D NUSPLX - NUMBER OF SIMPLEX (00 or 1)1E TFR10 - FILTERING OF « 10 » (0 TO 0,5 SECONDS [IN 1/100 SECONDS])1F TPRAU - HOMING TIME (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])20 RAUFAC1 RAUFAC2 TRAPM NIVRAU - HOMING FLOOR21 TGONG - GONG DURATION (0,1 TO 10 SECONDS [IN 1/10 SECONDES])22 COMDEM - NUMBER OF CAR TRIPS : 2 RIGHT HAND DIGITS23 COMDEM - NUMBER OF CAR TRIPS : 2 MIDDLE HAND DIGITS24 COMDEM - NUMBER OF CAR TRIPS : 2 LEFT HAND DIGITS25 NUMAR0 - ID NUMBER OF THE CONTROLLER (UNITS/DIZAINES)26 NUMAR1 - MONTH OF PRODUCTION OF THE CONTROLLER (IN HEXADECIMAL)27 NUMAR2 - YEAR OF PRODUCTION OF THE CONTROLLER28 REPT00 - POSITION INDICATOR AT LEVEL 00

29 to 36 REPTxx - POSITION INDICATOR AT LEVEL xx37 REPT15 - POSITION INDICATOR AT LEVEL 15

ADAPTATION FOR A SPECIFIC NON-CLASSED HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT ( CYHYD )38 V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR39 V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3A V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3B V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3C V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3D V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3E V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR3F V4 V3 V2 V1 LINE DELTA STAR40 RGPT VERSTF1 P1SFCOU P1SFCFE PMAFCP1 MSTPMP1 AMPSEC1 MSTPRP141 TP01 - FRONT DOOR TIME (2 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])42 TREP1 - FRONT DOOR RE-OPEN TIME (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])43 FRONT REAR NIVMHS - OUT OF SERVICE FLOOR44 TIRP1 - FRONT DOOR RELAY INVERSION TIME (0 TO 2,55 S. [IN 1/100 SEC])45 TFR8 - FILTERING OF « 8 » (0 TO 2,55 S. [IN 1/100 SEC])46 TVP1/2 - FRONT AND REAR DOOR LOOK TIME (1 TO 255 S. [IN SEC])47 TIGPO1 - FRONT DOOR INTEGRATOR TIME (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])

Page 237: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 96

CONTROLLER PARAMETERS TABLE (2/3)Add Seg. 7 Seg. 6 Seg. 5 Seg. 4 Seg. 3 Seg. 2 Seg. 1 Seg. 048 RCAME1

N00PORCAB1

N00OUAVAP1

N00STP1OU

N00SER1IN00

OUNSIM1N00

49 to 56 RCAME1Nxx

PORCAB1Nxx

OUAVAP1Nxx

STP1OUNxx

SER1INxx

OUNSIM1Nxx

57 RCAME1N15

PORCAB1N15

OUAVAP1N15

STP1OUN15

SER1IN15

OUNSIM1N15

58 TDEMYD - STAR/DELTA (Y/D ) START TIME (0 TO 6 SECONDS [IN 1/10 SEC])59 TARMVT - MOVEMENT STOP TIME (0 TO 2,55 S. [IN 1/100 SEC])5A TPMPVM - SLOW SPEED MOVEMENT PROLONGATION TIME (0 TO 0,5 SEC. [IN 1/100 SEC])5B TYPHYD - TYPE OF HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT5C RAMDES BASE8N DNH DEMDIR TAQUET5D DPLX NIVSIN DSERVS5E TRAUN0 - AUTOMATIC HOMING TIME TO LEVEL 0 (0 TO 15 MINUTS. [IN MINUT])5F STPREG DCTQET REGDRAL60 VERSTF2 P2SFCOU P2SFCFE PMAFCP2 MSTPMP2 AMPSEC2 MSTPRP261 TP02 - REAR DOOR TIME (2 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])62 TREP2 - REAR DOOR RE-OPEN TIME (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])63 CABVID SHTCS/ ISOCLI RMLIFT REGUL OuAvARCli TPRAL64 TIRP2 - REAR DOOR RELAY INVERSION TIME (0 A 2,55 S. [IN 1/100 SEC])67 TIGPO2 - REAR DOOR INTEGRATOR TIME (1 TO 255 SECONDS [IN SECONDS])68 RCAME2

N00PORCAB2

N00OUAVAP2

N00STP2OU

N00SER2IN00

OUNSIM2N00

69 to 76 RCAME2Nxx

PORCAB2Nxx

OUAVAP2Nxx

STP2OUNxx

SER2INxx

OUNSIM2Nxx

77 RCAME2N15

PORCAB2N15

OUAVAP2N15

STP2OUN15

SER2IN15

OUNSIM2N15

SPG4 SPG3 SPG2 SPG1 SPG4 SPG3 SPG2 SPG178 RF - OVERLOAD BUZZER VSU - OVERLOAD INDICATOR79 VHS - OUT OF SERVICE INDICATOR GONG - GONG OUTPUT7A INH1 - DOOR CELL OVER-RIDE OUTPUT VPMP - FIRE SERVICE INDICATOR7B LU - AUTOMATIC CAR LIGHT7E DEF N-2 - FAULT CODE 37F DEF N-3 - FAULT CODE 4

SLOW DOWN DISTANCE AS A FUNCTION OF THE OIL TEMPERATUREC0 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE C8 IS CHOSENC1 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE C9 IS CHOSENC2 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CA IS CHOSENC3 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CB IS CHOSENC4 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CC IS CHOSENC5 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CD IS CHOSENC6 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CE IS CHOSENC7 TEMPERATURE AT WHICH THE DISTANCE CF IS CHOSEN

SLOW DOWN DISTANCE AS A FUNCTION OF THE OIL TEMPERATUREC8 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C0C9 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C1CA SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C2CB SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C3CC SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C4CD SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C5CE SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C6CF SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C7

SLOW DOWN DISTANCE AS A FUNCTION OF THE OIL TEMPERATUREA8 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C0A9 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C1AA SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C2AB SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C3AC SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C4AD SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C5AE SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C6AF SLOW DOWN DISTANCE (EN %) CHOSEN UNTIL TEMPERATURE C7

MINIBLOCFF CA CB INS POMP NIV 10 8 6

Page 238: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 97

CONTROLLER INPUTS / OUTPUTS TABLE

= ON / REC OFF

Add Seg. 7 Seg. 6 Seg. 5 Seg. 4 Seg. 3 Seg. 2 Seg. 1 Seg. 000 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C001 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C80203 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M004 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M80506 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 M007 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D80809 NF7 NF6 NF5 NF4 NF3 NF2 NF1 NF00A NF15 NF14 NF13 NF12 NF11 NF10 NF9 NF80B0C SU ED MAN/ INS/ GM GD MASS/0D PH/ THV/DNH RP/NHM RG/RL RM/RY RD/R∆0E RKISO RZONE PRIC NS SUSD MHS POMP/0F FF1 COI1 CS1/ FCFE1/ FCOU1/10 FF2 COI2 CS2/ FCFE2/ FCOU2/11 EXD EXM CAB CAA12 MTH/ STH/ « 10 » « 8 » « 6 »

13 CREP LU/ FE1 OU1 CAM GV/PVor V2(VF) DE MO

14 V1(VF) V0(VF) SH8 INH2 INH1 FE2 OU215 DEF GONG FD FM VSU RF VHS VPMP16 QC7 QC6 QC5 QC4 QC3 QC2 QC1 QC017 QC15 QC14 QC13 QC12 QC11 QC10 QC9 QC81819 QM7 QM6 QM5 QM4 QM3 QM2 QM1 QM01A QM15 QM14 QM13 QM12 QM11 QM10 QM9 QM81B1C QD7 QD6 QD5 QD4 QD3 QD2 QD1 QD01D QD15 QD14 QD13 QD12 QD11 QD10 QD9 QD81E1F POS7 POS6 POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS020 POS15 POS14 POS13 POS12 POS11 POS10 POS9 POS82122 WEIGHT WEAK - ALTITUDE OF THE CAR23 WEIGHT STRONG - ALTITUDE OF THE CAR24 POSLOG - POSITION OF THE CAR28 CL61 V4(H) V3(H) V2(H) V1(H) ECOTAQ L ∆ Y62 IGV TACQ2 TACQ165 T°HUILE - OIL TEMPERATURE

MINIBLOCFF CA CB INS/ POMP/ NIV/ZDEVR « 10 » « 8 » « 6 »

Page 239: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 98

FAULT CODES LIST (1/3)

Faults displayed by the 32 series. (BG15 board)The letter shown in brackets signifies the type of fault.

• ( A ) Signifies that the fault is permanent and that the power supply needs to beturned off and back on again to RESET.

• ( B ) Signifies that the fault is temporary and that if the cause of the faultdisappears, the controller will work again as normal.

• ( C ) Signifies that the fault is temporary, asked for by the technician whenprogramming "provisional fault". (DCOPRO - Ad.07 - Bât.06)

• ( D ) Signifies that the fault can be ignored if the technician so requires.

• ( * ) Signifies that the fault is not registered in the fault list. The fault list on theSeries 32 can be found at addresses 00, 01, 7E, 7F (left hand switch inlower position). Address 00 shows the last fault and address 7F the oldestfault.

BEFORE LEAVING THE SITE, SET THE FAULT LIST BACK TO 00. INTHIS WAY YOU CAN KEEP BETTER TRACK OF ANY BREAKDOWNS.

WARNING :

PLEASE TAKE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU SEND US YOUR ELECTRONIC BOARDS(USE ANTI-STATIC BAGS)

FAULT N° DESIGNATION

-01- 0V CONNECTED TO EARTH. ( B )

-02- SLOW SPEED TIME EXCEEDED. ( A )

-03- INSPECTION TIME EXCEEDED. ( D )

-04- SAFETY LANE CUT BEFORE « 6 ». ( B )

-05- FAN THERMISTOR (THV). ( B )

-06- CONTINUAL ABSENCE OF « 10 » WHEN RETURNING TO GROUND. ( A )

-07- ERROR IN THE PROGRAMMING OF THE SPG1 TO SPG4 OUTPUTS. ( A )

-08- DEPARTURE DELAY (SUSD). ( B,*)

-09- MOTOR THERMISTOR (STH). ( B )

-10- INVERSION IN THE ROTATION DIRECTION (DETECTED BY THETAPE HEAD)

( A )

-11- INCORRECT READING BY THE TAPE HEAD OR PROBLEM WITHFUSES FU3 AND FU4.

( A )

-12- ONE OF THE CONTACTORS NOT DROPPED ON ARRIVAL. ( C )

-13- FAST SPEED CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED IN SLOW SPEED ( C )

-14- SLOW SPEED CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHEN REQUIRED ( C )

-15- MO OR DE CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHEN REQUIRED ORFU9 OUT OF SERVICE (24R).

( C )

-16- UP END LIMIT ON TEST (FREV). ( B,*)

Page 240: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 99

FAULT CODES LIST (2/3)

WARNING :

PLEASE TAKE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU SEND US YOUR ELECTRONIC BOARDS(USE ANTI-STATIC BAGS)

FAULT N° DESIGNATION

-17- PHASE FAILURE OR INVERSION (PH). ( B )

-18- RESET IMPOSSIBLE DUE TO FALSE INFORMATION FROM THETAPE HEAD.

( A )

-19- « 8 » HAS BEEN CUT WHILE LIFT IN MOTION. ( B )

-20- OIL TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 100°C OR GAUGE NOTCONNECTED.

( B )

-21- « 10 » MISSING. ( B )

-22- SLIP INTEGRATOR. ( A )

-23- « 6 » CUT WHILE LIFT IN MOTION OR SEE BRIDGE 0V, CS FOR NOCAR DOORS.

( B )

-26- TAPE HEAD FAULT BEAM A. ( A )

-27- TAPE HEAD FAULT BEAM B. ( A )

-28- ONE OF THE CONTACTORS NOT DROPPED BEFORE MOTION. ( C )

-29- FAST SPEED « GV » CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHENREQUIRED.

( C )

-30- SLOW SPEED « PV » CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED WHEN FASTSPEED « GV » REQUIRED.

( C )

-31- OVERLOAD FAULT (SU). ( B,*)

-36- MAIN FLOOR IS SET HIGHER THAN HIGHEST LEVEL. ( A )

-37- MORE THAN 16 LEVELS ARE PROGRAMMED (8 IF SELECTIVEACCESS).

( A )

-38- RESET, HOMING, OR OUT OF SERVICE FLOOR IS ABOVE HIGHESTFLOOR.

( A )

-39- MAINS POWER IS TOO WEAK. ( B )

-40- MAINS POWER IS TOO STRONG. ( B )

-41- « 8 » IS CUT, AUTOMATIC DOOR IS CLOSED DURINGORIENTATION.

( B )

-42- ERROR IN THE PROGRAMMING OF THE NUMBER OF DOOROPERATORS (EXCEED 2).

( A )

-43- END LIMIT NECESSARY FOR CAR DOOR OPERATOR ( A )

-44- « 10 » NOT ESTABLISHED FOR OPERATOR 1 OR 2. ( B )

-46- DOOR 1 OPEN LIMIT NOT REACHED. ( C )

-47- DOOR 2 OPEN LIMIT NOT REACHED. ( C )

-48- DOOR 1 CLOSE LIMIT NOT REACHED. ( C )

-49- DOOR 2 CLOSE LIMIT NOT REACHED ( C )

-50- OUT OF SERVICE MODE (MHS). ( B,*)

-51- GOODS CONTROL MODE (PRIC). ( B,*)

-52- « 10 » CUT WHILE IN MOTION. ( B )

-53- FIRE SERVICE MODE (POM). ( B,*)

-54- NON STOP OR FULL MODE (NS). ( B,*)

-55- « ISO » RELEVELLING CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED. ( A )

Page 241: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 100

FAULT CODES LIST (3/3)

WARNING:

PLEASE TAKE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU SEND US YOUR ELECTRONIC BOARDS(USE ANTI-STATIC BAGS)

FAULT N° DESIGNATION

-56- « ISO » RELEVELLING CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHENREQUIRED.

( B )

-57- LIFT HAS GONE PAST RELEVELLING ZONE DURING RELEVELLINGMOVEMENT.

( A )

-58- MORE THAN 6 RELEVELLING MOVEMENTS. ( B )

-59- RELEVELLING MOVEMENT EXCEEDS RELEVELLING TIME. ( A )

-60- MAXIMUM PROGRAMMED HEIGHT IS TOO HIGH. ( A )

-61- ERROR IN THE FLOOR PROGRAMMING. ( A )

-62- FAULT WITH THE O03 TAPE HEAD. ( A )

-63- CAR IS AT THE TOP AND THE BOTTOM AT THE SAME TIME, ORO03 TAPE HEAD NOT POWERED.

( A )

-64- CAR INSPECTION AND MACHINE ROOM INSPECTION SWITCHEDON AT THE SAME TIME.

( B )

-65- PERMANENT FAULT ON THE VF. CHECK THE FAULT CODE ONTHE MLIFT.

-66- TEMPORARY FAULT CODE ON THE VF. CHECK THE FAULT CODEON THE MLIFT.

-69- MOVEMENTS AFTER SAFETY LANE LIMITS HAVE BEEN CUT. ( A )

-70- ANTI-CREEP NOT DROPPED WHEN REQUIRED. ( A )

-71- ANTI-CREEP DROPPED WHILE CAR IN MOTION. ( B )

-72- ANTI-CREEP NOT DROPPED WHEN CAR AT REST. ( A )

-73- OIL LEVEL FAULT. ( A )

-74- MINIMUM OIL LEVEL. ( A )

-75- STAR CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHEN REQUIRED. ( C )

-76- DELTA CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHEN REQUIRED. ( C )

-77- LIGNE CONTACTOR NOT ENERGISED WHEN REQUIRED. ( C )

-78- STAR OR DELTA CONTACTOR NOT DROPPED. ( C )

-79- OIL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH. ( C )

Page 242: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - page 101

PARAMETERS CONCERNED THE SLOTTED TAPE

ZONEPV = SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZONARD = DOWN STOPPING ZONE

STOPPING POINT

ZONARM = UP STOPPING ZONE

ZONEPV = SLOW SPEED ZONE

ZDEVER = DOWN DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE

ZDEVER = UP DOOR UNLOCKING ZONELEVEL L

All of the information shown in the above table is shown in millimetres and indecimal, except the floor heights.

When the information is given over 2 addresses, the first address shows thethousands and hundreds, and the second shows the tens and units.

Name Designation Address

ZDEVER DOOR UNLOCKING ZONE ............................................... d4 and d5ZONARM UP STOPPING ZONE ....................................................... d2ZONARD DOWN STOPPING ZONE ................................................. d3ZONYST HYSTERISIS ZONE ........................................................... b6

Parameters linked to the relevelling

TPISO RELEVELLING TIMING 19BNDISO RELEVELLING JUMP ....................................................... bCZONARI RELEVELLING STOPPING ZONE .................................... d7

Parameters linked to the slow-down distance

DMINV2 MINIMUM DISTANCE FOR V2........................................... d8 and d9ZONPV1 SLOW SPEED ZONE 1 = V1 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE .. dA and dbZONPV2 SLOW SPEED ZONE 2 = V2 SLOW DOWN DISTANCE .. d0 and d1

Parameters linked to the floor heights

ALTNIV00 to

ALTNIV11…

ALTNIV15

Floor Height Level 00 .......................................................toFloor Height Level 11 (Alpha Serie) .....................................…Floor Height Level 15 (32 Serie)..........................................

For the floor heights automatic set-up of levels

81 and 80to

8F and 8E…

9F and 9E

Example: For a slow-down distance (or slow speed zone) of 800 mm (80 cm), you will read 08 ataddress d0, and 00 at address d1, i.e. 0800 millimetres.

Page 243: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 102

ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS (1/5)

L3L2L1N

PE

L3 L2 L1 N PE

- +

L3

L2

L1

PE

VEC07

3

42

1

- +PROTISTORFU+

RR

T3

T2

T1

TR

S

L

M3~

6

5

8

7

J1

2

1

4

3

L S

2

1

4

3

6

5

~ ~ ~

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

K100VF

+550VF

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

RECUP

CR

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

fr

K12K14

VEC01

BG22

KT3 KT2

- +

GE32LA32

K30 K28

CV RS

21

22 54

53

L S COM1 10 MO DE

K15

vent

VENT COM2 FR COM3

BRRC ~A1

A2LRC ~

A1

A2SRC ~

A1

A2

l s

61

62

61

62

K30CCLCCS 0V

LS

CBICAI+24 0V

KC22DE CAB CAA 0VMO1086RS

K4CAB CAA 0VMAN

N°28 kW / 11 HP / 20 A

K1

K9

K8

0VST

MODEL 2

Main Board BG15

+BR-BR

BR BR

RSterminal block

isolatingTo

RegenerativeResistors

RR =

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT FILTER

KC22(Bottom)

ENCODERINCREMENTAL

REDWHITEBLACK

GREEN

tooldiagnosticParameter/

devicemeasuring

Motor current

SONDETEMPERATURE

DISSIPATORHEAD

cableflat

14 point

blocksIsolating terminal

DISCONNECTIONSAFETY LANE

SWITCH

SAFETY LANECLOSED

DOOR

CONTACTLOCKEDDOOR

CONTACT

CASINGEARTH

EARTH CONNECTIONWITH A METAL SPACER

3 PHASEMOTOR

CURRENT FILTER

CURRENTMEASURING DEVICE

BRAKE

CABLESCREENED

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

KT2+19

-19

+24

INS

MANKM12

KC23

+24

INS

MANK30

10861S1S

K518 0

K10

18VEC14

CURRENT

SUPPLY

MEASURINGDEVICE

L2 PL1P

KT1

TAPE-HEADO03

CAB CAA +240V

KC22

CAB

CAA

+24

0V

12 VAC

18VAC

12VAC

0 220400

(0051)

VF SIDETerminals

A

ASUPPLY12 VAC

FuVE500mA

VENT

LS

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P6A 4AL2P2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -Fuse : 380 V dim: 6 X 32

BH08

C

CA D

H GRPH

K62

PH 0V

BoarddetectorPhasefail

*48 VDC / 180 VDC

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

Page 244: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 103

ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS (2/5)

MODELS 3 / 4

N°312 kW / 16,5 HP / 30 A

N°415,5 kW / 21 HP / 40 A

L3L2L1N

PE

L3 L2 L1 N PE

- +

L3

L2

L1

PE

VEC07

3

42

1

- +PROTISTORFU+

T3

T2

T1

TR

S

L

M3~

6

5

8

7

J1

2

1

4

3

L S

2

1

4

3

6

5

~ ~ ~

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

K100VF

+550VF

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

RECUP

CR

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

fr

K12K14

VEC01

BG22

KT3 KT2

- +

GE32LA32

K30 K28

CV RS

21

22 54

53

L S COM1 10 MO DE

K15

vent

VENT COM2 FR COM3

BRRC ~A1

A2LRC ~

A1

A2SRC ~

A1

A2

l s

61

62

61

62

K30CCLCCS 0V

LS

CBICAI+24 0V

KC22DE CAB CAA 0VMO1086RS

K4CAB CAA 0VMAN

K1

K9

K8

0VST

Main Board BG15

+BR-BR

BR BR

RSterminal block

isolatingTo

RegenerativeResistors

RR =

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT FILTER

KC22(Bottom)

ENCODERINCREMENTAL

REDWHITEBLACK

GREEN

tooldiagnosticParameter/

devicemeasuring

Motor current

SONDETEMPERATURE

DISSIPATORHEAD

cableflat

14 point

blocksIsolating terminal

DISCONNECTIONSAFETY LANE

SWITCH

SAFETY LANECLOSEDDOOR

CONTACTLOCKED

DOOR

CONTACT

CASINGEARTH

EARTH CONNECTIONWITH A METAL SPACER

3 PHASEMOTOR

CURRENT FILTER

CURRENTMEASURING DEVICE

BRAKE

CABLESCREENED

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

KT2+19

-19

+24

INS

MANKM12

KC23

+24

INS

MANK30

10861S1S

K518 0

K10

18VEC14

CURRENT

SUPPLY

MEASURINGDEVICE

L2 PL1P

KT1

TAPE-HEADO03

CAB CAA +240V

KC22

CAB

CAA

+24

0V

12 VAC

18VAC

12VAC

0 220400

(0051)

VF SIDETerminals

A

ASUPPLY12 VAC

FuVE500mA

VENT

LS

RR

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P6A 4AL2P2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -Fuse : 380 V dim: 6 X 32

BH08

C

CA D

H GRPH

K62

PH 0V

Boarddetector

Phasefail

*48 VDC / 180 VDC

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

Page 245: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 104

ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS (3/5)N°5

20,6 kW / 28 HP / 50 A

MODEL 5L3L2L1N

PE

L3 L2 L1 N PE

- +

L3

L2

L1

PE

VEC07

3

42

1

- +PROTISTORFU+

T3

T2

T1

TR

S

L

M3~

6

5

8

7

J1

2

1

4

3

L S

2

1

4

3

6

5

~ ~ ~

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

K100VF

+550VF

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

RECUP

CR

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

fr

K12K14

VEC01

BG22

KT3 KT2

- +

GE32LA32

K30 K28

CV RS

21

22 54

53

L S COM1 10 MO DE

K15

vent

VENT COM2 FR COM3

BRRC ~A1

A2LRC ~

A1

A2SRC ~

A1

A2

l s

61

62

61

62

K30CCLCCS 0V

LS

CBICAI+24 0V

KC22DE CAB CAA 0VMO1086RS

K4CAB CAA 0VMAN

K1

K9

K8

0VST

Main Board BG15

+BR-BR

BR BR

RSterminal block

isolatingTo

RegenerativeResistors

RR =

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT FILTER

KC22(Bottom)

ENCODERINCREMENTAL

REDWHITEBLACK

GREEN

tooldiagnosticParameter/

devicemeasuring

Motor current

SONDETEMPERATURE

DISSIPATORHEAD

cableflat

14 point

blocksIsolating terminal

DISCONNECTIONSAFETY LANE

SWITCH

SAFETY LANECLOSED

DOOR

CONTACTLOCKEDDOOR

CONTACT

CASINGEARTH

EARTH CONNECTIONWITH A METAL SPACER

3 PHASEMOTOR

CURRENT FILTER

CURRENTMEASURING DEVICE

BRAKE

CABLESCREENED

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

KT2+19

-19

+24

INS

MANKM12

KC23

+24

INS

MANK30

10861S1S

K518 0

K10

18VEC14

CURRENT

SUPPLY

MEASURINGDEVICE

L2 PL1P

KT1

TAPE-HEADO03

CAB CAA +240V

KC22

CAB

CAA

+24

0V

12 VAC

18VAC

12VAC

0 220400

(0051)

VF SIDETerminals

A

ASUPPLY12 VAC

FuVE500mA

VENT

LS

RR

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P6A 4AL2P2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -Fuse : 380 V dim: 6 X 32

BH08

C

CA D

H GRPH

K62

PH 0V

Boarddetector

Phasefail

*48 VDC / 180 VDC

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

Page 246: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 105

ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS (4/5)N°6

25 kW / 34 HP / 70 A

MODEL 6L3L2L1N

PE

L3 L2 L1 N PE

- +

L3

L2

L1

PE

VEC07

3

42

1

- +PROTISTORFU+

T3

T2

T1

TR

S

L

M3~

6

5

8

7

J1

2

1

4

3

L S

2

1

4

3

6

5

~ ~ ~

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

K100VF

+550VF

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

RECUP

CR

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

fr

K12K14

VEC01

BG22

KT3 KT2

- +

GE32LA32

K30 K28

CV RS

21

22 54

53

L S COM1 10 MO DE

K15

vent

VENT COM2 FR COM3

BRRC ~A1

A2LRC ~

A1

A2SRC ~

A1

A2

l s

61

62

61

62

K30CCLCCS 0V

LS

CBICAI+24 0V

KC22DE CAB CAA 0VMO1086RS

K4CAB CAA 0VMAN

K1

K9

K8

0VST

Main Board BG15

+BR-BR

BR BR

RSterminal block

isolatingTo

RegenerativeResistors

RR =

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT FILTER

KC22(Bottom)

ENCODERINCREMENTAL

REDWHITEBLACK

GREEN

tooldiagnosticParameter/

devicemeasuring

Motor current

SONDETEMPERATURE

DISSIPATORHEAD

cableflat

14 point

blocksIsolating terminal

DISCONNECTIONSAFETY LANE

SWITCH

SAFETY LANECLOSEDDOOR

CONTACTLOCKEDDOOR

CONTACT

CASINGEARTH

EARTH CONNECTIONWITH A METAL SPACER

3 PHASEMOTOR

CURRENT FILTER

CURRENTMEASURING DEVICE

BRAKE

CABLESCREENED

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

KT2+19

-19

+24

INS

MANKM12

KC23

+24

INS

MANK30

10861S1S

K518 0

K10

18VEC14

CURRENT

SUPPLY

MEASURINGDEVICE

L2 PL1P

KT1

TAPE-HEADO03

CAB CAA +240V

KC22

CAB

CAA

+24

0V

12 VAC

18VAC

12VAC

0 220400

(0051)

VF SIDETerminals

A

ASUPPLY12 VAC

FuVE500mA

VENT

LS

RR

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P6A 4AL2P2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -Fuse : 380 V dim: 6 X 32

BH08

C

CA D

H GRPH

K62

PH 0V

Boarddetector

Phasefail

*48 VDC / 180 VDC

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

Page 247: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 106

ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS (5/5)N°7

34,6 kW / 47 HP / 81 A

MODEL 7L3L2L1N

PE

L3 L2 L1 N PE

- +

L3

L2

L1

PE

VEC07

3

42

1

- +PROTISTORFU+

T3

T2

T1

TR

S

L

M3~

6

5

8

7

J1

2

1

4

3

L S

2

1

4

3

6

5

~ ~ ~

L1 L2 L3PE

L1' L2' L3'PE

K100VF

+550VF

X2

X1

Y2

Y1

Z2

Z1

RECUP

CR

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

VEC05

L3P

L2P

L1P

PE

fr

K12K14

VEC01

BG22

KT3 KT2

- +

GE32LA32

K30 K28

CV RS

21

22 54

53

L S COM1 10 MO DE

K15

vent

VENT COM2 FR COM3

BRRC ~A1

A2LRC ~

A1

A2SRC ~

A1

A2

l s

61

62

61

62

K30CCLCCS 0V

LS

CBICAI+24 0V

KC22DE CAB CAA 0VMO1086RS

K4CAB CAA 0VMAN

K1

K9

K8

0VST

Main Board BG15

+BR-BR

BR BR

RSterminal block

isolatingTo

Regenerative Resistorsin separte cabinet

RR =

3 PHASENETWORKCURRENT FILTER

KC22(Bottom)

ENCODERINCREMENTAL

REDWHITEBLACK

GREEN

tooldiagnosticParameter/

devicemeasuring

Motor current

SONDETEMPERATURE

DISSIPATORHEAD

cableflat

14 point

blocksIsolating terminal

DISCONNECTIONSAFETY LANE

SWITCH

SAFETY LANECLOSED

DOOR

CONTACTLOCKED

DOOR

CONTACT

CASINGEARTH

*48 VDC / 180 VDC

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

EARTH CONNECTIONWITH A METAL SPACER

CURRENTMEASURING DEVICE

BRAKE

CABLESCREENED

BRAKEPOWER SUPPLY

KT2+19

-19

+24

INS

MANKM12

KC23

+24

INS

MANK30

10861S1S

K518 0

K10

18VEC14

CURRENT

SUPPLY

MEASURINGDEVICE

L2 PL1P

KT1

TAPE-HEADO03

CAB CAA +240V

KC22

CAB

CAA

+24

0V

12 VAC

18VAC

12VAC

0 220400

(0051)

VF SIDETerminals

A

ASUPPLY12 VAC

FuVE500mA

VENT

LS

RR

1

2 3

GE 32 TB 1916A 4AL1P6A 4AL2P2A 2AL3P

LA 32 -Fuse : 380 V dim: 6 X 32

BH08

C

CA D

H GRPH

K62

PH 0V

Boarddetector

Phasefail

6 x 2200µF

3 PHASEMOTOR

CURRENTFILTER

Page 248: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 107

THREE PHASES OR SINGLE PHASE DOOR OPERATOR, FRONT AND REAR DOORS

L2PA 2A

L1PA 2A

L3PA 2A

Earth

FRONT DOOR

UT1 VT1 WT1

U1 V1 W1

N

PE

L1

L3

L2

N

OU1 FE1

M13 ~

P253MVRC+ECRETEUR

430V maxi.

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

REAR DOOR

UT2 VT2 WT2

U2 V2 W2

OU2 FE2

M23 ~

P253MVRC+ECRETEUR

430V maxi.

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

BG19 Board2°nd automatic

BG15 Main board

KA14

1S

FE1OU1

TERMINAL BLOCKSISOLATING

RS

CASING EARTH

FE2OU2

KA15

Connector (KA14)COM3

BG15 Main board

TO

Connector (KA15)COM4

BG19 board

FROM

48VDC INJECTION FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR

IO2 IR2 IF2

OU2

FE2

-RD IO1 IR1 IF1

OU1

FE1

WIRING FOR CLIENTS

POWERINJECTION

FU "INJ"1.6 A

REAR DOORFRONT DOOR

Earth

FRONT DOOR

UT1 VT1 WT1

U1 V1 W1

N

PE

L1

L3

L2

N

OU1 FE1

M13 ~

P253MVRC+ECRETEUR

430V maxi.

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

L2PA 2A

L1PA 2A

L3PA 2A

door board

MOTOR

3 PHASE

L4PA 2A

L6PA 2A

L5PA 2A

A

P

L4

L5

L6

PH1

PH2

A = AuxiliairyP = Principal

CapacitorPhase displacement

OU1 FE11 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

UT1 VT1 WT1

P2511 36 8

SINGLE-PHASE

MOTORFRONT DOOR

Page 249: SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR - clark ukclark-uk.co.uk/downloads/Series 32 VVVF.pdf · AUTINOR Installation Manual SERIE 32 MLIFT VECTOR Programmation Vectorielle Programme: B-HB32 Programme:

Série 32 Mlift Vector - Prog.Vectorielle Installation manual Chapter VII - Page 108

TRACTION MOTOR FAN

642

531 VENT

THV2THV1 THV3VENT

TCVRS 1S

98

97

K62

THV95

96THV

M23 ~ θ

U2 V2 W2

MAIN BOARDLift Command

CASINGEARTH

TRACTION MOTOR FAN

THERMO-CONTACTFAN

642

531

0V THV

THV2THV1

M1 ~

U V

OR

+ RTH(optional)

SUPPLYTRIPHASE

SUPPLYSINGLE PHASE

SINGLE OR TRIPHASE

CLIENTWIRING